Skip to main content

Full text of "On the teaching of English reading : with a running commentary on the Dale readers - steps to reading; first primer; second primer; infant reader"

See other formats


ON  THE 
TEACHING  OF  ENGLISH  READING 


Copyright  in  the  United  States  of  America,  1899 
by  D.  Affleton  &  Co. 


All  rights  reserved 


E  TEACHING  OF 
ENGLISH   READING 

WITH  A  RUNNING  COMMENTARY 

ON 

THE  DALE  READERS 


STEPS  TO  READING 
FIRST  PRIMER 
SECOND  PRIMER 
INFANT  READER 


NELLIE  DALE 


THIRD  EDITION 


LONDON 
GEORGE  PHILIP  &  SON,  LTD.,  32  FLEET  STREET 

LIVERPOOL:  PHILIP,  SON  &  NEPHEW,  LTD.,  45-51  SOUTH  CASTLE  STREET 

1907 


TO 

Miss  EDITH  HASTINGS 

HEADMISTBESS  OB 

THE  WIMBLEDON  HIGH  SCHOOL 
I  DEDICATE  THIS  BOOK 

AS  A  MARE  OF 
MY  ESTEEM  AND  GRATITUDE 


NOTE 

IT  is  impossible  adequately  to  express  my  gratitude  to  the 
many  friends  who  have  taken  a  warm  interest  in  these 
Readers. 

I  owe  especial  thanks 

To  Miss  HASTINGS,  in  whose  school  it  has  been  my  privi- 
lege to  teach.  Every  facility  has  been  given  me  for  the 
working  out  of  the  scheme,  and  it  is  entirely  due  to  her 
kind  encouragement  that  the  plans  have  ever  developed. 

To  Mr  WALTER  CRANE  for  the  sympathetic  interest  he  has 
shown  in  the  Readers  and  for  his  charming  illustrations, 
which  will  give  so  much  joy  to  the  children  and  will  help 
them  so  greatly  to  the  appreciation  of  their  mother-tongue. 

To  Dr  H.  FRANK  HEATH  for  the  keen  interest  he  has 
taken  in  the  work,  and  for  his  delightful  "  First  Talk 
about  English." 

To  Mr  WALTER  RIPPMANN,  who  has  shown  unwearying 
kindness  in  going  through  the  whole  work  with  me,  and 
to  whom  I  am  indebted  for  most  helpful  suggestions  and 
advice,  his  sympathy  with  the  child  mind  rendering  his 
aid  singularly  valuable. 


1899. 


Til 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

PREFACE  (by  Dr  H.  F.  HEATH)       .  .  .  .       xiii 

COLOURED  PLATES  facing  xvi  &  40 

INTRODUCTORY  EEMARKS  ON  THE  SECOND  EDITION    .  .          1 

ON  THE  TEACHING  OP  ENGLISH  EEADING — 

General  Kemarks         .....          7 

Apparatus       ......         13 

The  Tabulating  Frame  .  .  .  .14 

Plan  of  Method  .....         15 

Production  of  Sounds  Tested  by  Experiment  .  .         18 

The  Sympathies  of  the  Children ;  Interest  aroused  by 

calling  in  their  Help         .  .  .  .19 

Attractiveness  of  Colour  to  Children   .  .  .22 

Visual  Impression  not  confused  by  the  use  of  Colour  .         22 
On  the  Teaching  of  a  Sound    .  .  .  .23 

On  Word  Building      .....         24 

On  Sentence  Making  .  .  .  .  .26 

On  Heading  and  Writing         .  .  .  .28 

Transition  from  Colour  to  Uniform  Black  .         28 

On  the  Teaching  of  Capitals         .  .  .30 

For  Purposes  of  Revision  .  .  .31 

The  Subject  Matter  of  the  Readers  .  .         32 

be 


Contents 


ON  THE  EARLY  STAGES        .... 
A  RUNNING  COMMENTARY — 

ON  THE  STEPS  TO  READING      .  .  . 

Lesson  on  a  Sound,  with  its  Symbol        . 
Steps.     Page  3.     p,  b— t,  d— C  k  q, 

a  (bat) 

First  Lesson  in  Word  Building    . 
m— n— ng 
Steps.     Page  5.     i,  y  (til,  kitty) 

7      I   P 
ii  ii     ••     ')  ' 

„          „    9.     h— w,  wh 
u  (pwll) 
qu— f,  ph,  v 
„  11.     u  (muff)  . 

„  „  13.    th,  ttn 

e(egg)J 

„          „  15.    s,  c,  s,  z  ^ 
o(top) 
sh,  ch,  s 

„          „  16.    a,  the,  to,  of 

ON  THE  FIRST  PRIMER  (Studies  1-18)  . 
Double  Sounds — ch  (cftat) 
X  (sia;)  . 
j  (/imp) 
tch  (match) 
nk  (i&nk) 
g  (magic) 


PAGE 

36 


37 

37 

37 

44 
48 
51 
53 

56 

64 
66 

68 

75 

79 
83 

.  84,  94 
85 
96 

.  103 
106 


Contents  xi 

PAGE 

ON  THE  SECOND  PRIMER  (Studies  19-47)          .  .       109 

Double  Sounds — x  (eoact)  .  .  .121 

dg  (bri^e)       .  .  .134 

ON  THE  INFANT  READER  (Studies  48-86)          .  .      138 

Some  Remarks    on  the  Production   of    English    Speech 

Sounds,  by  Walter  Rippmann,  M.A.  .  .153 

A  Talk  about  English,  by  Dr  H.  Frank  Heath       .  .162 

List  of  Nature  Talks  and  Cosy  Chats          .  .  .168 

Table  of  Consonants,  showing  the  order  in  which  they  are 

Taught  ......       172 

Key  to  the  Table  of  Consonants      .  .  .  .173 

Table  of  Vowels  and  Key   .  .  .  .  .174 


xiv  Preface 

modern  science  of  phonetics  has  revealed.  Without  a 
systematic  study  of  sounds  this  book  could  not  have  come 
into  existence;  but  the  child  is  never  allowed  to  suspect 
that  he  is  learning  anything  half  so  abstruse.  It  is  the 
results  of  phonetic  investigation  which  are  used,  not  the 
jargon  or  the  hieroglyphics  of  the  phonetician. 

To  attain  this  end  the  whole  English  vocabulary  available 
for  use  by  very  young  children  has  been  carefully  classified 
in  such  a  way  that  only  the  easy,  regular  and  normal 
spellings  are  encountered  first,  the  irregular  and  difficult 
forms  being  gradually  introduced  at  the  point  which  is 
easiest  for  the  child.  The  classification  of  the  vocabulary, 
combined  with  the  use  of  colour  for  the  discrimination  of 
different  types  of  sound,  has  made  it  possible  to  teach 
reading  on  a  purely  phonetic  system  without  the  use  of 
any  diacritics  at  all  for  the  consonants. 

When  *  diacritics  are  used  over  vowels,  as  is  in  some  form 
inevitable  from  the  poverty  of  our  alphabet,  they  are  merely 
warning  signs  above  the  symbol,  and  are  never  used  in  the 
words  themselves  lest  a  wrong  visual  impression  should  be 
given.  The  great  objection  to  any  phonetic  system  of 
learning  to  read  hitherto  in  use  has  been  that  the  large 
use  of  diacritics  necessary  in  the  rendering  of  modern 
English  sounds  forms  a  serious  hindrance  to  the  child 
when  he  comes  to  take  the  step  from  the  phonetic  reader 
to  the  normal  printed  page.  In  this  system  the  visual 
impression  is  the  same  in  form  from  the  beginning — the 
only  variation  is  in  the  colour.  The  difference  between  the 

*  The  author  has  avoided  the  use  of  diacritics,  see  Note,  p.  22,  and 
"Further  Notes,"  pp.  170-172,  220. 


Preface  xv 

first  steps  and  the  later  is  no  more  than  that  between  a 
painted  picture  and  a  photograph  of  it.  The  identity  of 
the  scene  represented  in  the  two  can  never  be  a  moment  in 
doubt.  Nor  are  these  the  only  advantages  gained.  The 
classification  of  the  words  used  enables  the  progress  to  be 
gradual,  so  that  the  children  go  straight  forward  without 
a  set  back.  A  scamper  through  is  sure  to  necessitate  a 
frequent  retracing  of  the  way,  and  this  wearies  the  little 
ones.  They  are  given  much  practice  in  the  use  of  the 
short  vowels  which  are  relatively  easy  in  English  while  they 
are  making  the  consonants  a  real  possession,  and  they  are 
consequently  unhindered  by  any  uncertainty  about  these 
when  they  come  to  attack  the  long  vowels  and  irregularities 
of  our  language. 

Love  of  colour  and  love  of  movement  are  very  strong  in 
little  children.  Only  second  to  them  comes  the  love  of 
pictures.  Here  they  will  have  all  three  tastes  satisfied,  and, 
what  is  more,  made  a  means  of  training.  The  coloured 
chalks  which  they  will  use  and  the  plans  suggested  in 
the  following  pages  will  give  plenty  of  scope  for  both 
colour  sense  and  movement.  The  beautiful  designs  with 
which  Mr  Walter  Crane  has  decorated  the  children's  book- 
lets and  the  lavish  care  and  taste  shown  in  the  pro- 
duction of  this  series  will  furnish  artistic  training  of  the 
highest  value.  The  education  of  both  eye  and  ear  which 
this  system  ensures  brings  with  it  careful  habits  and  a 
sense  for  accuracy.  Spelling  therefore  is  improved  and 
the  pronunciation  no  less.  Further,  the  pains  taken  in  the 
systematic  mastering  of  English  sounds  will  pave  the  road 
for  the  foreign  language  teacher.  Nor  are  the  more  purely 


xvi  Preface 

intellectual  faculties  left  untouched,  for  the  logical  sense  is 
appealed  to  by  the  grouping  together  of  words  of  like  kind. 
But  what  need  for  me  to  interpose  myself  longer  between 
the  author  and  the  teacher  ?  Every  difficulty  likely  to  be 
encountered  seems  anticipated  in  the  following  pages,  and  I 
feel  pretty  certain  that  it  is  not  the  little  ones  alone  who 
will  gain  by  the  use  of  these  readers.  Their  joy  will  find 
its  first  reflection  in  the  mood  of  those  whose  pleasure  it 
will  be  to  lead  the  children  onwards  in  a  study  which, 
approached  in  this  way,  will  be  full  of  interest  and 
suggestion  to  children  of  a  larger  growth. 

H.  FRANK  HEATH. 
1899. 


Plate  1. 
TABLE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


Double  Bounds. 


c 

X 

p 

t 

k 

qu* 

b 

d 

g 

X 

n  k 

m 

n 

ng 

nq  u 

1 

- 

ng 

r 

ch 

tch 

f 

s      s  h 

w     t 

ph 

th 

c      ch 

h 

g 

dg 

w 

s 

V 

th 

s 

w 

z 

J 

*  See  Notes,  pp.  43,  60.  t  See  Note,  p.  57. 

(Key  on  p.  172.) 


Plate  2.  See  p.  14. 

VOWEL    TABLE. 
(Short  vowels  only.) 


y 

e  o 


i  1 1,    k  i  1 1  y  pull 

egg  top 

bat       m  u  f f 


Plate  3.  see  P.  so. 

TABLE  OF  CAPITAL  LETTERS. 


P  T 

B  D 

M  N 


F  S      Sh  Ch 

W  h  T  h  H 

Ph  C      Ch 

W  G 

V        Th 

W  Z  J 


u 


Plate  5.  Bee  p.  98 

1. 

ca  p 
hat 
sack 


2. 

cab 
lad 

stag 

3. 

ham  hams 

pan  pans 

fang  fangs 

Plate  5.  See  p.  116. 

pack  tax 

packing  taxing 

quack  than  k 

quacking  than  king 

bang  catch 

banging  catching 

splash  stam  p 

splashing  sta  m  pi  ng 

wa  sh  wan  t 

washing  wanting 


Plate  6.  See  p.  126. 

pant  land 

panted  landed 

print  gild 

printed  gilded 

rest  mend 

rested  mended 


Plate  7.  See  p.  130. 

pack  kiss 

-i 

packed  ki  sse  d 

smash  mix 

smashed  mixed 

thank  limp 

thanked  limped 

watch  pinch 

watched  pinched 

bang  f i  1 1 

banged  f  i  1 1 e d 


Plate  8.  see  p.  no. 

nap  skip 

nap  ping  skipping 

ch  at  sit 

ch  att  i  ng  sitt  i  ng 

wag  di  g 

wagging  digging 

cram  swim 

cramming  swimming 

fan  spin 

fanning  spinning 


REDUCED  VOWELS. 

along  atoms  signal 

afresh  blossom  kennel 

astonish  given  difficult 

seven 

On  "  reduced  vowels,"  see  p.  29. 


Plate  9.  Bee  p.  l«. 

pat  pad 

patted  padded 

nit  nod 

kn  i  tted  nodded 

strut  bud 

strutted  budded 


Plate  10.  See  p.  118. 

tap  step 

tapped  stepped 

trim  hug 

trimmed  hugged 

pin  scrub 

pinned  scrubbed 


Plate  11. 
SILENT  CONSONANTS. 


See  p.  19 


wrist 

knit 

1  a  m  i: 

1  i  m  r 

w  pen 

knelt 

d  u  m 

wrec  k 

n  u  m 

whip 

t  h  u  m 

wrong 

which 

c  r  u  m 

w     en 

bom 

Plate  12. 

WORDS  FOR  STEPPING. 

c  at 

himself 
splendidly 
ast  o  n  is  h  m  ent 


See  p.  25. 


INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  SECOND  EDITION. 

SHORTLY  after  the  publication  of  "Further  Notes  on  the 
Teaching  of  English  Heading,"  *  I  was  called  upon  to 
prepare  a  new  edition  of  the  present  book.  I  have  there- 
fore been  able  to  make  certain  revisions  and  additions, 
and  to  refer  to  the  supplementary  chapters  in  "Further 
Notes." 

As  the  two  books  are  intended  to  be  used  side  by  side 
from  the  outset,  a  few  notes  on  the  revisions  and  on  the 
way  in  which  the  books  complement  each  other  may  be 
found  helpful 

Pages  7-31 

The  above  pages  may  be  regarded  as  giving  a  general 
idea  of  the  subject  under  consideration.  The  details  of  the 
teaching  will  be  found  in  the  later  pages  of  this  book  and 
in  "  Further  Notes." 

Among  the  revisions  in  pages  7-34,  I  would  especially 
draw  attention  to  the  Note  on  p.  22.  It  will  be  seen 
that  the  Tabulating  Frame  not  only  enables  the  children  to 

*  This  ia  published  by  G.  Philip  &  Son,  Ltd.     See  p.  175. 
A  l 


2  Introduction 

classify  their  speech  sounds  and  symbols  gradually,  but, 
with  the  aid  of  the  "  pet  word,"  it  also  helps  them  to  gain 
clear  ideas  about  similar  symbols  representing  different 
sounds  (e.g.  cat,  mince,  baby,  Mary,  father)  and  different 
symbols  representing  similar  sounds  (e.g.  fish,  Philip,  truth, 
moon).  For  the  "  home "  in  the  Frame  represents  the 
dwelling  of  a  particular  sound,  and  the  pet  words  contain 
the  symbols  for  that  sound.  There  is  consequently  no  need 
for  the  use  of  diacritics  over  the  consonants  or  the  vowels, 
and  we  can  therefore  dispense  with  the  one  diacritic  which 
appeared  in  the  first  four  Eeaders.  (See  "  Further  Notes," 
pp.  58;  170-172;  220.) 

In  connection  with  pages  7-34,  see  "  Further  Notes," 
pp.  3-12. 

Page  36. 

Short  notes  on  the  Early  Stages  are  given  on  page  36 
and  reference  is  made  to  pages  13-48  of  "Further  Notes," 
where  full  details  will  be  found. 

No  letters  or  symbols  are  used  during  this  early  train- 
ing, but  the  work  that  the  children  are  doing  is  of  supreme 
importance,  for  they  are  preparing  themselves  to  handle  the 
later  difficulties  with  the  greatest  ease  and  pleasure. 

If  in  Stage  1  we  lead  them  to  talk  intelligently,  to 
pronounce  their  words  correctly,  and  to  reproduce  the 
things  they  talk  about,  they  will  have  daily  opportunities 


Introduction  3 

for  the  training  of  the  eye,  ear  and  hand,  and  they  will  thus 
be  equipping  themselves  for  the  work  before  them. 

Their  discovery  of  spoken  sounds  in  Stage  2  will  enable 
them,  when  they  are  introduced  to  speech  signs,  to  build 
unseen  spoken  words  without  the  least  difficulty. 

The  comparison  of  spoken  sounds  in  Stage  3  will  lead 
them  at  a  later  date  to  decide  upon  the  colour  of  each 
symbol  before  they  see  it.  (See  p.  19.) 

The  attention  that  they  give  to  the  production  of  their 
sounds  in  Stage  4  will  help  them  subsequently  to  choose 
the  "home"  of  each  symbol  in  the  Frame.  (See  pp.  19 
and  14.) 

Pages  37-152. 

These  pages  contain  the  Eunning  Commentary  on  my 
first  four  children's  books,  the  "  Steps  to  Beading,"  the 
First  and  Second  Primer,  and  the  Infant  Eeader.  * 

The  notes  on  the  teaching  of  the  speech  signs  and  on 
each  Study  have  been  revised,  and  some  pages  have  been 
re-written. 

Some  new  reproductions  of  the  children's  work  will  be 
found  facing  p.  40.  Plates  1  and  2  show  the  use  of  the 
new  books  for  symbols  and  words  :  these  books  have  wide 
lines  on  the  right-hand  page  for  printing,  and  a  blank  page 
on  the  left  for  illustrations.  Plate  3  shows  a  Study 

*  See  p.  176. 


4  Introduction 

printed  in  a  more  advanced  book  arraDged  for  printing  and 
writing  in  connection  with  the  First  Primer  and  the 
later  Eeaders.  Keproductions  of  children's  work,  showing 
dictation,  writing,  and  pictorial  composition  will  be  found 
in  Plates  1-7  of  "Further  Notes."  The  way  in  which 
the  children  turn  their  printing  into  writing  is  described  in 
Chapter  xxiii.  of  "  Further  Notes,"  and  suggested  words  for 
writing  are  also  given. 

For  supplementary  chapters  bearing  upon  pages  37-152, 
see  "  Further  Notes,"  pp.  49-166. 


Note  on  the  Double  Sounds. 

The  children  wished  to  have  Embroidery  Cards  for  all 
the  double  sounds  among  the  consonants.  I  have  therefore 
arranged  that  they  should  be  published  as  Series  C. 

The  double  sounds  are  associated  with  a  "  pet  word " 
introduced  in  a  story  told  in  connection  with  the  picture 
appearing  on  the  card  (e.g.  see  p.  83).  They  are  handled 
in  a  similar  manner  to  the  simple  sounds,  and  the  cards  are 
mounted  as  records  of  the  lessons.  (See  "  Further  Notes," 
pp.  71-73.)  Eeference  to  the  list  of  Contents  will  show 
where  they  occur.  (See  pp.  x,  xi.) 

For  nqu  and  ng,  see  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  234 
and  193. 


Introduction  5 

On  Book  I  * 

When  the  children  have  worked  through  their  first  four 
books,  they  pass  on  to  Book  I.,  which  introduces  the  long 
vowel  sounds,  and  the  ways  in  which  they  are  represented. 
Notes  on  th&  handling  of  this  book  will  be  found  in  the  third 
part  of  "  Further  Notes."  (See  pp.  167-260.) 

In  response  to  special  requests,  I  have  kept  as  far  as 
possible  to  the  same  pagination  as  in  the  previous  edition. 
Reference  to  the  Contents  will  show  what  transpositions 
were  thought  advisable. 

*  This  is  published  by  G.  Philip  &  Son.    See  p.  175. 


ON  THE  TEACHING  OF  ENGLISH  READING. 

"  WOKDS  are  as  much  subjects  of  experiment  as  gases ;  the 
words  which  we  speak  every  hour,  when  we  come  to  ex- 
amine them,  what  wonderful  secrets  do  they  tell  !  How 
much  self-knowledge  may  be  gained  by  the  most  imperfect 
meditation  upon  their  roots  and  growth !  Children  are 
especially  delighted  by  this  exercise.  Their  faces  become 
brighter,  freer,  fuller  of  deep  meaning,  as  they  engage  in 
it ;  awful  truths  seem  to  be  shining  into  them  and  out  of 
them.  And  they  find  that  the  words  which  they  speak  are 
not  to  be  trifled  with ;  a  lie  becomes  a  serious  thing  to 
them ;  they  not  only  know  from  your  teaching,  but  in  a 
measure  feel  for  themselves  what  it  is."  * 

The  above  words  express  so  beautifully  what  I  feel  to 
be  the  result  of  an  intelligent  study  of  its  own  language 
upon  the  child  that  I  quote  them  with  a  sense  of  deep 
gratitude  to  the  writer,  who  was  himself  a  noble  pioneer  in 
the  cause  of  education. 

The  path  we  take  in  order  to  reach  the  desired  end  is 
beset  with  many  difficulties  and  how  best  to  surmount  them 
is  a  serious  question. 

*  Extract  from  a  Lecture  on  "  Queen's  College,  London,  its  objects 
and  methods,"  given  by  the  Rev.  Frederick  Denison  Maurice,  M.A., 
March  29th,  1848. 

T 


8  On  the  Teaching 

If  it  is  true  that  in  the  teaching  of  all  subjects  the  early 
stages  require  the  teacher's  most  earnest  attention,  it  surely 
applies  most  of  all  to  the  learning  of  the  mother  tongue, 
which  stands  in  the  very  centre  of  the  child's  life  when  it 
begins  to  think  for  itself.  It  is  then  that  it  surprises  us  by 
its  adherence  to  fact,  and  its  decided  preference  for  what  is 
strictly  logical  ;  and,  keeping  this  in  view,  it  will  be  needful 
for  us  to  present  the  beginnings  of  our  subject  in  as  syste- 
matic a  form  as  we  can.  But  the  child  is  more  than  a  mere 
logician.  We  shall  fail  sadly  if  our  teaching  does  not  appeal 
to  the  heart  of  the  child,  its  warm  sympathies,  its  love  of  fun. 

If,  in  teaching  the  mother  tongue,  we  can  succeed  in 
satisfying  both  aspects  of  the  child  mind,  it  will  become 
an  educational  force,  which  will  go  on  working  long  after 
childhood  is  past. 

But  some  regard  the  learning  to  read  as  a  burden  which 
must  indeed  be  taken  up,  to  be  thrown  off  as  quickly  as 
possible.  What  might  be  like  a  pleasant  summer  walk,  with 
fresh  discoveries  in  hedge  and  wayside  brook,  becomes  a 
hurried  scamper  along  a  dusty  road.  The  dust  gets  in  the 
eyes,  and  the  child  stumbles  wearily  on;  in  other  words,  the 
intelligence  is  blunted.  Many  who  feel  strongly  how  in- 
jurious the  effect  is  would  defer  the  learning  to  read. 

Yet  the  fault  lies  surely  in  the  handling  of  the  subject 
rather  than  in  the  subject  itself,  though  it  is  so  beset  with 
difficulties;  and  I  hope  to  show  that  in  the  teaching  of 
Heading  we  have  at  our  command  a  perfect  store-house  of 
treasure,  by  means  of  which  we  may  cultivate  the  habit  of 
observation  with  its  twin-sister,  accuracy  :  for  who  is  more 
naturally  observant  and  enquiring  than  the  little  child; 


of  English  Reading  9 

who  more  ready  to  do  real  earnest  work  ;  who  more  ready 
to  be  interested  ? 

In  view  of  these  beautiful  characteristics,  it  becomes  a 
serious  duty  on  our  part  in  no  wise  to  check  development 
by  injudicious  handling.  We  shall  be  doing  the  children 
irremediable  harm  if,  at  the  very  outset,  we  cripple  their 
powers,  thus  limiting  their  sphere  of  usefulness  and  depriv- 
ing them  of  the  full  enjoyment  of  life,  with  all  its  beauty.  ; 

If  we  base  our  teaching  on  a  sympathetic  study  of  the 
children,  we  shall  find  that  they  will  become  fellow-workers 
with  us.  And  we  have  in  our  subject  one  which,  from  its 
rich  and  varied  character,  is  well  fitted  to  become  a  perfect 
centre  of  instruction. 

The  method  which  ia  now  submitted  to  the  considera- 
tion of  teachers  is  the  outcome  of  practical  experience,  the 
children  having  played  a  very  important  part  in  helping 
to  build  it  up. 

They  have  taken  the  keenest  interest  in  it  and  have 
made  the  most  valuable  suggestions.  It  is  owing  to  their 
share  in  the  work  that  one  hopes  it  may  prove  really 
helpful. 

Nothing  taught  that  is  not  valuable  later  on. 

In  the  method  employed,  one  has  avoided  from  the  out- 
set the  teaching  of  anything  which  would  not  be  of  real 
value  later  on. 

The  way  in  which  the  sounds  of  the  language  are  taught 
haa  been  based  on  phonetic  principles,  and  it  is  found  that 
the  attention  given  to  the  production  of  sound  at  once  in- 


io  On  the  Teaching 

terests  the  children  and  cultivates  the  power  of  observation, 
in  addition  to  the  valuable  training  that  it  gives  to  the  ear. 
This  will  pave  the  way  for  the  appreciation  of  foreign 
sounds,  and  lighten  the  work  of  the  modern  language 
teacher. 

The  early  training  that  the  children  receive  gives  them 
the  power  to  attack  the  difficulties  which  must  be  approached 
later.  Their  knowledge  of  regular  forms  makes  them  keenly 
observant  of  irregularities,  and  many  of  these  have  such  in- 
teresting causes,  that  one  must  call  history  and  geography 
to  one's  aid  for  the  explanation  of  them.  This  is  a  great 
advantage,  for  it  gives  increased  means  of  appeal  to  the 
sympathies  of  the  children,  and  creates  endless  bonds  of 
interest  between  them  and  the  teacher. 

[One  little  child,  who  was  supposed  to  be  unable  to  learn  to 
read,  was  greatly  helped  from  the  historical  side.  Whenever  a 
difficulty  was  explained  by  an  appeal  to  the  history  of  the  language, 
her  eyes  would  brighten  with  the  keenest  appreciation,  and  her  diffi- 
culties become  smoothed.  She  became  quickly  a  most  intelligent 
reader,  and  I  feel  that  she  learnt  to  read  entirely  from  the  point  of 
view  of  "  in  the  olden  times." 

Those  possessing  an  instinct  for  travel,  find  our  journeys  on  the 
map,*  to  bring  home  words,  a  great  delight.] 

Throughout  the  work,  great  care  is  taken  to  do  every- 
thing with  a  view  to  the  promotion  of  good  spelling.  If 
this  were  the  natural  companion  of  Beading,  which,  with 
carefully  graduated  work  and  classified  readers,  I  think  it 
might  be,  much  unnecessary  and  fruitless  labour  might  be 
saved. 

*  If  the  geographical  knowledge  is  not  sufficiently  advanced  to  allow 
of  the  use  of  a  map,  the  journey  is  taken  in  imagination. 


of  English  Reading  1 1 

The  children  see  how  important  it  is  that  the  eye  should 
help  the  ear,  and  various  plans  are  used  to  cultivate  this  eye- 
memory.  (See  p.  26.) 

Especial  care  will  be  taken  in  subsequent  readers  to 
group  together  the  useful  words  of  like  spelling  which 
contain  a  peculiar  difficulty. 

This  will  impress  these  words  as  belonging  to  a  group 
upon  the  minds  of  the  children,  and  save  the  useless  expendi- 
ture of  energy  which  must  result  from  their  meeting  with 
them  scattered  in  the  text  before  they  have  a  real  grasp  of 
them. 

On  the  other  hand,  some  time  will  intervene  between  the 
learning  of  words  which  are  pronounced  alike,  but  in  which 
the  sounds  are  represented  by  different  symbols. 

Some  would  wish  to  surmount  the  difficulties  of  Beading 
by  a  spelling  reform,  in  which  phonetic  spelling  should  take 
the  place  of  the  present  one,  which  is  mainly  historical. 
Such  an  attempt,  however,  must  be  doomed  to  failure,  inas- 
much as  the  spoken  language  is  a  living  thing  and  ever 
progressing.  There  can,  therefore,  be  no  such  finality  as 
would  be  implied  by  the  adoption  of  a  phonetic  spelling. 

Possessing  a  language  so  rich  and  so  varied,  it  would  be 
an  act  of  vandalism  to  reduce  it  to  one  dead  level,  and  the 
loss  in  historic  interest  would  be  incalculable.  Words  de- 
rived from  Greek,  Latin,  and  other  foreign  sources  would 
lose  their  distinctive  character ;  and  when  one  remembers 
that  each  word  is  the  result  of  human  thought  and  implies 
the  need  of  human  expression,  one  would  think  seriously 
before  employing  means  which  would  close  the  channels 
by  which  those  words  have  come  to  us,  and  thus  sever  the 


12  On  the  Teaching 

link  which  unites  us  with  the  past,  with  its  power  of  culti- 
tivating  in  us  the  feeling  of  deep  reverence. 

The  elementary  readers  now  offered  to  the  public  will 
shortly  be  followed  by  others  *  more  advanced.  These  will 
form  a  natural  continuation  of  the  earlier  readers,  and  as 
the  children  will  have  gained  so  much  power  during  the  first 
stages  of  their  journey,  they  will  be  enabled  to  travel  on 
with  very  little  help. 

It  is  hoped  that  in  the  course  of  their  travels  their 
sympathies  will  have  been  widened,  the  habit  of  self- 
reliance  cultivated,  and  that  the  general  gain  to  the 
intelligence  will  make  them  more  truly  helpful  in  the 
work  of  the  world. 

*  Since  the  above  was  written,  Book  I.  of  "  The  Dale  Readers  "  has 
been  published  (G.  Philip  &  Son).  Book  II.  is  in  the  press.  Book  III. 
is  in  preparation.  For  full  details  of  the  books  already  published, 
see  p.  175. 


of  English  Reading  13 


Apparatus.* 

The  apparatus  required  includes  : — 

1.  A  Frame  for  the  tabulation  of  the  consonants  and 
vowels,  with  a  sub-division   set  apart  for  building.     (See 
p.  14.) 

2.  A  box  of  Symbols  printed  in  colour  and  eyeletted, 
for  use  with  the  Tabulating  Frame. 

3.  Cards   for   the   pricking    and   embroidering   of    the 
symbols,  with  drawings  illustrative  of  them. 

4.  Black-boards  or  slates  for  the  use  of  the  children. 

(Each  of  my  little  pupils  has  a  black-board  inside  the  lid  of  her 
desk.  Black-board  cloth  nailed  on  the  inside  of  the  lid  has  proved  very 
satisfactory.  This  cloth  is  five  shillings  per  yard  (44  inches  wide),  and 
the  average  cost  is  sixpence  for  each  child.  Some  of  the  lids  were 
painted  black  inside,  and  the  average  cost  of  this  was  sixpence  a  desk. 
But  the  cloth  wore  so  much  better  than  the  painted  surface  that  we 
soon  had  it  put  in  all  the  desks. 

These  black-boards  are  a  source  of  perpetual  joy  to  the  children, 
giving  endless  scope  for  the  exercise  of  their  activity,  and,  from  the 
teacher's  point  of  view,  they  are  most  helpful,  for  the  work  of  the  whole 
class  can  be  seen  at  a  glance,  and  incorrect  work  prevented  by  timely 
warning.  See  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  261,  section  4. 

In  addition  to  the  above,  we  have  black-boards  inserted  as  panels  in 
the  wall  at  a  height  which  the  children  can  conveniently  reach.) 

5.  Coloured  black-board  chalks. 

6.  Coloured  chalks  for  printing  on  paper. 

7.  Printing  books.     (See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  262.) 

*  The  apparatus  is  supplied  by  Messrs  George  Philip  &  Son, 
32  Fleet  Street,  London.  For  full  details,  see  "Further  Notes," 
pp.  261,  202. 


14  On  the  Teaching 

8.  A  special  black-board  on  which  the  studies  can  grow 
up.  (See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  2 6 2,  section  8.) 

It  is  important  that  this  special  black-board  should  always  hang  so 
that  the  whole  class  can  see  it  easily.  The  children  then  have  their 
"  new  friends  "  (see  p.  21)  continually  before  them,  and  are  delighted  to 
refer  to  them  whenever  an  opportunity  arises  for  so  doing.  The  black- 
board cloth  mentioned  above  is  extremely  convenient  for  this  b.b.,  as  it 
can  be  hung  on  the  wall  like  a  map,  and  can  be  raised  or  lowered  by  a 
very  simple  pulley  arrangement. 

Tabulating  Frame. 

The  Tabulating  Frame  has  been  designed  for  the  gradual 
classification  of  the  sounds  by  the  children. 

The  part  on  the  left  hand  is  reserved  for  the  consonants, 
that  on  the  right  for  the  vowels.  The  shelf  between  the 
Vowel  Tables  is  arranged  for  word-building. 

The  consonants  are  classified  according  to  their  mode  and 
place  of  production.  They  are  arranged  from  left  to  right 
in  order  to  show  the  progression  from  lips  to  throat.  (See 
Plate  1  and  diagram  on  p.  161.)  The  voiced  consonants  are 
placed  under  the  voiceless.  (See  p.  18.)  In  cases  in  which 
a  consonant  sound  may  be  represented  in  two  or  three  ways, 
the  symbols  are  placed  under  each  other,  the  most  frequent 
being  placed  first.  (See  Plate  1.) 

A  column  is  set  apart  for  double  sounds  which  cannot 
be  arranged  on  any  rigid  plan  owing  to  the  separate  sounds 
of  which  they  are  composed. 

This  classification,  with  the  use  of  colour,  has  made  it 
possible  to  avoid  the  introduction  of  diacritics  among  the 
consonants.  (See  p.  22.) 

The    varying    height    in    the    vowel    table    shows    the 


of  English  Reading  15 

position  of  the  tongue.  Here  again  the  left  suggests  the 
front  and  the  right  the  back  of  the  mouth.  (See  Plate  2 
and  p.  158.) 

The  taking  down  and  replacing  of  the  various  symbols 
for  building  purposes  will  exercise  thought  on  the  part  of 
the  individual  child,  and  as  the  whole  class  watches  criti- 
cally, all  minds  will  be  at  work. 

Mr  Walter  Eippmann  has  supplied  some  notes  on  the 
production  of  the  sounds  of  the  consonants  and  of  the  short 
vowels.  These  notes  will  be  found  in  pp.  153-160. 

In  the  early  readers,  no  long  vowel  sounds  are  intro- 
duced. It  was  a  matter  of  extreme  difficulty  to  avoid  the 
use  of  them,  but  I  noticed  that  they  led  to  confusion  when 
introduced  in  the  early  stages,  before  the  short  vowel  sounds 
were  fully  grasped. 

If  a  sure  knowledge  of  the  consonantal  sounds  and  short 
vowel  sounds  is  gained  first,  the  children  will  be  unhindered 
by  uncertainty  about  these  when  attacking  irregular  forms. 

Plan  of  Method. 

The  children  are  encouraged  from  the  outset  to  find  out 
as  much  as  possible  by  themselves.  In  the  Early  Stages, 
after  some  practice  in  talking,  they  discover  spoken  sounds, 
compare  them,  and  notice  how  they  are  produced.  (For 
fuller  details,  see  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  13-48.) 

They  are  then  introduced  to  speech  signs. 

Note. — It  is  most  important  that  the  sounds  and  not  the 
names  of  the  letters  should  be  given  by  the  children. 

When  a  few  consonantal  sounds  (the  stops)  with  their 


1 6  On  the  Teaching 

printed  symbols  have  been  learnt  (each  in  connection  with 
a  word),  and  the  short  vowel  sound  a  (bat),  they  begin  to 
construct  words  (see  "  Steps  to  Reading,"  p.  3),  which  they 
sound  and  step  (see  p.  25). 

The  words  built  are  made  the  centre  of  interest  by 
means  of  the  stories  which  introduce  them,  these  stories 
being  illustrated,  if  possible,  by  dramatic  action. 

The  children  then  print  the  words  first  with  the  right 
hand,  then  with  the  left,  on  their  blackboards  (or  slates), 
using  coloured  chalks.  They  also  make  pictures  to  illustrate 
them.  (See  "  Children's  Work,"  p.  40.) 

They  then  look  for  the  words  in  the  "  Steps  to  Beading  " 
and  find  the  pictures  illustrating  them.     (See  pp.  37-48.) 

It  is  quite  delightful  to  see  with  what  new  interest  the 
most  familiar  objects  become  invested  when  a  word  has 
been  fully  realised. 

When  most  of  the  words,  which  it  is  possible  to  con- 
struct with  the  sounds  at  command,  have  been  built,  a  new 
symbol  is  taught  and,  in  the  next  lesson,  it  is  used  for 
building  words  which  contain  it.  Each  succeeding  symbol 
that  is  taught  will  thus  give  wider  scope  for  the  exercise  of 
the  power  which  the  children  are  gaining. 

The  little  groups  of  words  in  the  "Steps  to  Reading" 
contain  most  of  the  words  that  it  is  possible  to  build  with 
the  given  sounds. 

By  the  time  that  the  children  have  worked  through  this, 
they  will  have  gained  a  practical  knowledge  of  the  simple 
consonantal  sounds,  and  of  the  short  vowel  sounds;  they 
will  have  had  much  practice  in  combining  them  into  words ; 
they  will  be  able  to  print  the  symbols  representing  sounds 


of  English  Reading  17 

dictated  to  them,  and  to  print  from  dictation  any  of  the 
words  contained  in  their  "  Steps  to  Beading." 

They  will  already  have  had  some  eye-training,  for  the 
frequency  of  ck  (pack),  11  (ill),  ff  (ruff),  in  words  of  one 
syllable  in  which  the  sound  is  heard  once  only,  though 
two  symbols  are  seen,  will  have  impressed  them  with  the 
need  of  friendliness  on  the  part  of  the  eye.  The  cases  in 
which  the  same  sound  is  expressed  in  two  or  more  different 
ways  (/ish,  Philip,  cat,  king,  g-uack)  will  have  given  further 
training  of  this  kind.  (See  "  Further  Notes,"  pp.  151-156.) 

The  illustration  of  the  words  by  sentences  and  pictures 
will  satisfy  the  child's  perfectly  natural  desire  to  understand 
what  he  is  doing. 

In  the  last  page  of  the  "  Steps  to  Beading  "  the  useful 
little  words  a,  the  before  a  consonant,  to,  of,  are  introduced. 
As  they  contain  short  vowel  sounds,  their  introduction  is 
not  inconsistent  with  the  general  plan  of  the  work. 

A  few  capital  letters  will  also  have  been  introduced. 
(See  p.  30.) 

The  "stepping"  of  words  (see  p.  25)  will  have  given 
them  a  "  feeling  M  for  syllabising.  They  will  already  have 
met  three  words  of  two  syllables.  Long  words  of  regular 
notation  present  no  difficulty,  and  therefore  their  gradual 
introduction  in  the  text  need  not  be  avoided.  (See  p.  32.) 
The  children  are  thus  prepared  for  the  building  of  the  studies 
contained  in  the  First  and  Second  Primer  and  the  Infant 
Beader,  and  for  the  reading  of  the  text. 

It  is  very  important  that  the  "  Steps  to  Beading  "  should 
not  be  hurried.  If  the  children  are  allowed  to  take  the  active 
part  suggested  in  the  method,  they  will  show  the  pace  at 

B 


1 8     .  On  the  Teaching 

which  it  is  possible  to  proceed,  and  time  spent  by  them  in 
making  this  early  part  a  real  possession  will  be  amply 
repaid  later  on. 

If  they  get  a  true  grasp  of  the  elements  of  the  language 
it  gives  them  a  power  of  making  their  own  way  which  is 
lacking  amongst  children  who  have  been  "  told "  words. 
These  may  read  fairly  well  until  they  meet  with  an  un- 
familiar word;  they  then  look  up  expecting  to  be  told 
by  the  teacher.  One  feels  that  the  supplying  them 
with  the  ready-made  has  made  them  unaccustomed  to  exert 
themselves,  and  has  thus  deprived  them  of  the  power  of 
readily  attacking  a  difficulty.  When  one  remembers  how 
willing  children  are  to  take  infinite  pains  over  things  which 
are  interesting  to  them,  one  would  use  every  possible  means 
to  avoid  checking  this  earnestness. 

Production  of  Sounds  Tested  by  Experiment. 

Throughout  all  the  work  the  children  are  encouraged 
to  find  out  the  way  in  which  sounds  are  produced  by  their 
own  experiments. 

Thus  the  distinction  between  voiceless  and  voiced  sounds  can  be 
proved  by  (1)  pressing  the  hands  close  to  the  ears  whilst  uttering  the 
sound,  when  the  vibration  of  the  vocal  chords  in  voiced  sounds  is  very 
preceptible  (cf.  hiss  and  buzz) ;  (2)  the  placing  of  the  hand  in  front  of 
the  mouth  whilst  uttering  the  sound,  which  shows  the  varying  force 
with  which  the  breath  is  expelled  (cf.  cap  and  ca6).  The  children 
readily  notice  that  in  the  case  of  p  the  emission  of  breath  is  much  more 
forcible  than  in  the  case  of  b  ;  and  they  much  enjoy  the  voyage  of  dis- 
covery in  search  of  the  reason.  They  feel  that  b  is  quite  justified  in 
making  his  exit  in  a  less  energetic  manner  than  p,  as  he  has  already 
been  busy  setting  the  vocal  chords  in  motion.  (See  Note  on  vocal  chords, 
p.  153,  and  small  type  on  p.  36.) 


of  English  Reading  19 

Having  decided  by  these  experiments  that  a  consonant 
is  voiceless,  it  is  clothed  in  blue ;  if  voiced,  it  is  clothed  in 
Hack  on  a  white  surface,  or  in  white  on  a  black  surface. 
This  reversing  has  not  presented  any  difficulty  to  the 
children.  (See  Note  on  p.  36.) 

Note. — Silent  consonants  are  dressed  in  yellow.  (See 
p.  58,  and  Plate  11.) 

The  unobstructed  passage  of  a  vowel  sound  decides  its 
character  as  a  person  of  great  importance,  to  be  clad  in  red. 
The  vowels  are  always  printed  in  red,  whatever  part  they 
may  play.  As  they  are  the  difficulty  of  our  language,  it 
was  thought  wiser  to  accentuate  their  presence  by  their 
brilliant  colour.  (See  Stage  3,  p.  3.) 

The  position  of  each  symbol  on  the  Tabulating  Frame  is 
also  determined  by  the  children.  In  the  case  of  lip-letters, 
they  watch  each  other  as  they  utter  the  sound.  For  sounds 
produced  inside  the  mouth  the  action  of  the  tongue  is  tested 
by  placing  a  finger  in  the  mouth.  (See  Stage  4,  p.  3.) 

It  is  a  great  advantage  to  have  children  in  the  class 
who  are  cutting  the  second  front  teeth  as  the  action  of  the 
tongue  can  be  more  clearly  seen. 

It  helps  the  children  very  much  if  they  close  their  eyes 
when  trying  to  evolve  sounds  which  are  produced  in  the 
interior  of  the  mouth. 

The  Sympathies  of  the  Children. 
Interest  aroused  by  calling  in  their  Help. 

That  the  children  should,  by  the  exercise  of  their 
observation,  understanding,  and  intelligence,  be  their  own 
teachers,  as  far  as  possible,  is  the  key-note  of  the  method. 


2o  On  the  Teaching 

How  anxious  they  are  to  help  is  proved  by  the  trouble  they 
take  to  fit  themselves  for  sharing  in  the  work. 

A  little  child  of  five  years  old  told  me  that  she  was  practising 
"studies"  at  home,  and  she  hoped  soon  to  be  able  to  print  well  enough 
to  do  words  on  the  big  black-board.  The  vigour  of  her  printing  gives 
every  hope  of  her  wish  being  realised.  (See  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  108.) 

Care  is  taken  to  call  in  the  aid  of  as  many  helpers  as 
possible.  This  can  be  most  easily  done  by  allowing  the 
children  to  choose  each  other.  They  are  rigid  discipli- 
narians, and  it  is  most  interesting  to  the  teacher  to  watch 
the  class  under  their  command.  It  is  an  understood  thing 
that  no  child  should  be  chosen  a  second  time  until  all  have 
had  the  pleasure  of  sharing  in  some  part  of  the  work. 

In  addition  to  the  active  part  they  take  in  the  class- 
room, they  are  constantly  telling  me  of  the  word*  which 
they  have  noticed  in  the  course  of  their  readings  at  home. 

Their  picture  books  are  also  brought  if  they  find  any  pictures 
in  them  which  they  think  will  lend  themselves  to  the  illustra- 
tion of  a  word  which  has  become  a  "friend."  (See  p.  21.) 

They  invest  each  sound  with  its  symbol  with  a 
*  personality  of  its  own  and  regard  its  variations  (c  in  cat,  c  in 
mince)  as  playful  little  ways.  These  variations  are  eagerly 
sought  for  and  hailed  with  delight. 

When  the  word  picnic  was  printed  on  the  black-board,  one  of  them 
remarked,  "  How  pleased  '  the  fat  baby '  (their  name  for  C,  to  distinguish 
it  from  k  and  C|)  must  be  to  come  out  alone  twice  in  that  word"  (see  p.  47). 

*  Cf.  "L'enfant  predestine"  excellait  dans  les  majuscules,  dans  la 
ronde  ;  il  avait  remarqu£  que  chaque  lettre  a  son  caractere  propre,  sa 
tenue  particuliere,  ses  sympathies  et  ses  antipathies,  que  les  unes 
sont  fieres,  glorieuses,  hautaines,  que  d'autres  sont  des  etres  faibles  qui 
cherchent  un  appui."  (Extract  from  an  article  on  Jean-Francois  Millet 
in  "Revue  des  Deux  Mondes,"  le  mai  1898.) 


of  English  Reading  21 

They  take  great  pleasure  in  personating  the  sounds  in 
a  given  word.  The  "  sounds "  are  chosen  and  stand  in  a 
close  line  facing  the  class.  The  children  repeat  the  word 
in  chorus  and  the  living  sounds  then  "take  distance," 
each  uttering  (in  succession)  the  sound  he  or  she  is 
personating. 

Every  word  built  is  looked  upon  as  a  "  new  friend  "  and 
is  quickly  noticed  in  the  reading  lesson.  One  is  warned  of 
its  near  approach  by  the  gleam  in  the  eyes  of  each  little 
reader  who  looks  up  to  see  if  one  is  prepared  for  the  joy  in 
store.  Should  they  meet  many  new  "  friends  "  they  seem  to 
feel  that  life  is  almost  too  blessed. 

In  the  reading  that  followed  the  building  of  a  few  words  in  which 
tch  appeared  (Dutch,  hutch,  crutch)  a  little  child  looked  up  and  said  in 
a  very  confidential  tone,  "  The  sneezing  sister  (their  name  for  tch)  is 
coming  in  '  kitchen '  in  the  next  line." 

It  is  truly  a  privilege  to  teach  so  fascinating  a  subject 
to  such  appreciative  learners. 

The  calling  in  of  the  children's  activity  satisfies  the  love 
of  movement,  which  is  one  of  their  strongest  characteristics, 
and  is  also  a  sure  means  of  checking  undue  hurry,  which  is 
so  fatal  to  progress. 

If  they  make  their  own  pace,  their  work  will  be 
accurate,  for  each  new  difficulty  will  have  been  met  by 
them,  and  will  have  been  turned  into  a  "  friend."  How 
naturally  accurate  they  are  is  proved  by  the  way  in  which 
they  reproduce  a  previous  lesson,  or  quickly  notice  any 
variation  one  may  make  in  telling  a  story  the  second 
time. 


22  On  the  Teaching 

Attractiveness  of  Colour  to  Children. 

The  use  of  colour  gives  much  pleasure  to  the  children 
and  is  besides  most  valuable  as  a  means  of  impressing  upon 
them  the  difference  of  sound.  As  one  watches  them  at 
work  one  can  see  how  surely  this  has  been  grasped. 

The  choosing  of  suitable  garments  for  their  words  is  often  a  subject 
of  conversation  out  of  school  hours. 

They  notice  with  great  interest  the  different  points  that  the  use  of 
colour  reveals  (c/.  geese  and  cheese) ;  also  use  (with  a  blue  «)  and  use 
(with  a  black  s) ;  the  colour  paves  the  way  for  understanding  many 
grammatical  difficulties  at  a  later  date.  (See  "  Further  Notes,"  pp.  225, 
241.) 

Visual  Impression  not  confused  by  use  of  Colour. 

The  use  of  colour  for  the  differentiation  of  sound  does 
not  confuse  the  form,  therefore  the  reading  of  books  printed 
in  the  ordinary  manner  presents  no  difficulty. 

There  is  no  introduction  of  diacritics  in  the  words  head- 
ing the  text  of  the  Eeaders,  nor  in  the  text  itself.  It  was 
felt  most  important  that  from  the  outset  there  should  be 
no  confusion  of  the  visual  impression  of  a  word. 

Note. — By  the  use  of  colour  and  by  the  way  in  which  the  consonants 

C 
are  tabulated  (e.g.  the  children  know  that  g,  brother  to  k  =  g  in  gig ; 

q 

and  that  g  in  the  double  sounds  column  =  g  in  magic),  we  find  it 
possible  to  manage  without  any  markings  to  distinguish  the  variation  of 
sound  that  may  be  given  to  one  consonant  symbol  In  the  case  of  the 
vowel  sounds  where  we  may  have  one  symbol  employed  for  so  many 
different  sounds,  the  locality  in  the  Frame  again  proves  most  helpful, 
for  this,  together  with  the  careful  handling  of  the  type  or  "  pet  word," 
enables  us  to  avoid  the  use  of  any  diacritics.  (See  pp.  1,  2.) 

(We  have  therefore  been  able  to  discontinue  the  use  of  the  warning 
sign  over  U  as  in  muff.  See  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  58.) 

Fuller  details  on  these  points  will  be  found  in  "Further  Notes," 
pp.  170-172  ;  220. 


of  English  Reading  23 

On  the  Teaching-  of  a  Sound  with  its  Symbol. 

Each  symbol  is  taught  in  connection  with  a  word 
introduced  in  a  story.  This  word  is  repeated  by  all  the 
children  in  chorus  and  they  then  discover  the  initial  sound. 
(See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  74,  75.) 

They  find  out  whether  it  is  a  "  sister  "  or  a  "  brother  " 
sound,  and  the  colour  of  the  dress  is  decided  upon  accordingly. 
(See  pp.  18,  19.) 

The  particular  organ  of  speech  used  to  produce  the 
sound  is  next  considered.  (See  p.  19.) 

The  children  enjoy  comparing  the  sound  with  any  in 
Nature.  The  symbol  representing  the  sound  is  then  shown. 
A  description  is  gained  and  it  is  compared  with  other  known 
symbols.  The  teacher  prints  it  on  the  b.b.  in  its  simplest 
form  *  and  the  children  draw  it  in  the  air.  This  is 
followed  by  their  printing  it  on  their  b.b.  or  slates  with 
coloured  chalks.  They  use  both  right  and  left  hand.  They 
also  make  a  picture  illustrating  the  word  which  introduced 
the  sound. 

They  now  have  to  consider  where  the  symbol  must  be 
placed  in  the  Tabulating  Frame.  This  will  recall  the  way 
in  which  the  sound  was  produced,  and  the  home  will  be 
chosen  in  accordance  with  this.  (See  p.  14.) 

The  symbol  is  put  in  its  "  home "  by  one  of  the 
children.  It  is  also  found  in  the  "  Steps  to  Beading." 

In  a  later  lesson  the  children  print  the  symbol  in  their 
Sound  book,  and  make  a  picture  illustrating  the  "  pet  word." 
(See  Children's  Work,  p.  40.) 

*  The  same  as  that  used  in  the  "  Steps  to  Reading," 


24  On  the  Teaching 

The  symbol  is  pricked  and  embroidered  in  connection 
with  the  above,  the  children  using  the  same  colours  as 
in  printing.  A  set  of  designs  has  been  specially  prepared 
for  this  work.  At  the  side  of  the  printed  symbol  is  a 
picture  which  they  will  meet  again  in  the  course  of  their 
journey  through  their  books.  These  drawings  are  illustrative 
of  the  word  suggested  in  the  "  Running  Commentary  *  for  the 
evolution  of  the  sound.  The  children  are  allowed  to  colour 
these  drawings  as  they  please  and  to  introduce  additions  to 
the  picture  if  they  wish.  (See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  71-73.) 

Note. — Every  care  should  be  taken  to  prevent  the 
children  from  uttering  harsh  sounds.  They  should  be  given 
to  understand  that  distinctness  of  speech  depends  more  on 
clearness  of  enunciation  than  on  volume  of  sound. 

It  is  important  that  lessons  on  new  sounds  should  be 
given  in  the  early  part  of  the  morning,  and  that  the  lessons 
should  be  short. 

On  Word  Building. 

The  groups  of  words  in  colour  follow  the  order  in  which 
the  consonants  have  been  taught.  (See  p.  172  and  Note 
on  h,  p.  75.) 

Each  word  is  introduced  in  a  story,  and  the  symbols  are 
taken  down  from  the  Frame  in  the  order  in  which  the  sounds 
are  uttered. 

Words  with  a  single  sound  preceding  the  vowel  appear 
first,  and  the  occupants  of  the  various  "  homes  "  come  out 
in  turn  to  help  to  make  them,  those  which  cannot  help 
being  regarded  as  unhappy  little  folk,  worthy  of  much  pity. 

It  interests  the  children  greatly  to  find  a  "  sister  "  and 


of  English  Reading  25 

a  "brother"  sound  (see  p.  36)  each  making  a  word  (p&t, 
bat ;  /an,  i>an). 

Occasionally  the  initial  sound  remains  unchanged,  and 
the  final  sounds  vary. 

Having  taken  most  of  the  words  that  can  be  made  with 
a  single  sound  preceding  the  vowel,  the  story  continues  and 
introduces  words  in  which  the  vowel  is  preceded  by  two  or 
more  consonantal  sounds. 

Each  word  is  built  by  the  children  as  it  is  introduced. 
(See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  76-81.) 

As  the  powers  of  the  children  develop,  they  will  wish 
not  only  to  suggest  the  words,  but  to  tell  the  story  intro- 
ducing them.  (See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  106.) 

At  the  end  of  the  building  lesson  they  open  their 
Eeaders  and  identify  the  various  words. 

Note. 

Great  care  is  taken  to  avoid  the  incorrect  presentation 
of  words  to  the  children.  Where  there  are  two  or  three 
ways  of  representing  a  sound,  the  children  are  asked  to 
point  to  the  symbol  they  think  of  using,  or,  if  they  have 
not  had  sufficient  experience  to  give  them  the  required 
knowledge,  they  are  told  which  one  to  use,  e.g.  the 
king  k;  the  magic  g;  the  sound  being  uttered  and 
not  the  name  of  the  letter.  (See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  152.) 

The  children  much  enjoy  "  stepping "  their  words,  a 
step  forward  being  taken  as  each  vowel  is  uttered.  This 
helps  them  to  the  realisation  of  the  number  of  syllables  in 
a  given  word. 

The  accented  part  of  a  word  is  marked  by  a  heavy  step. 


26      .  On  the  Teaching 

Note. — They  take  a  step  with  one  foot  and  bring  the 
other  to  the  first  position  (heels  together)  so  that  they 
may  stand  firmly  during  the  utterance  of  the  consonantal 
sounds.  (See  "  Further  Notes,"  pp.  122-129.) 

The  children  much  enjoy  drawing  silent  letters  in  the 
air  when  they  come  to  the  part  of  the  word  in  which  a 
silent  letter  lives.  This  accentuates  the  presence  of  the 
silent  friend,  and  the  pause,  during  which  its  outline  is 
being  described  in  the  air,  attracts  the  attention  of  the  rest 
of  the  children,  who  watch  critically  to  see  if  it  is  invested 
with  a  correct  form.  See  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  127  (/). 

Drawing  in  the  air  will  also  be  found  helpful  when 
sounding  words  containing  double  letters,  which  give  one 
sound  only,  particularly  when  these  words  are  done  from 
memory.  (See  pp.  47,  48,  55.) 

On  Proceeding  from  Speech  to  Sign. 

Special  stress  is  laid  upon  the  evolution  of  words  by  the 
children,  as  one  has  to  take  care  that  they  do  not  learn  to 
read  by  heart.  This  reading  by  heart  may  be  very  mis- 
leading to  the  teacher,  who  may  imagine  that  they  are 
making  progress,  only  to  find  that  it  is  a  pure  matter 
of  memory,  and  that  they  cannot  point  to  the  words  that 
they  have  been  repeating  so  fluently,  possibly  with  the  book 
upside  down.  (See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  85,  86.) 

On  Sentence  Making. 

The  children  give  two  or  three  sentences  to  illustrate 
each  word  built  in  the  previous  lesson.  This  is  a  sure 
means  of  testing  their  real  grasp  of  the  word. 


of  English  Reading  27 

I  have  been  much  struck  by  the  want  of  familiarity  sometimes 
shown  by  intelligent  children  with  words  which  I  should  have  thought 
almost  too  much  in  use  to  present  the  least  difficulty. 

This  makes  one  realise  that  their  knowledge  of  words  is  more 
limited  than  is  generally  supposed. 

This  practice  is  also  valuable  in  giving  scope  for  the 
exercise  of  originality,  and  for  the  play  of  the  imagination. 

The  children  take  the  keenest  pleasure  in  this  making 
of  sentences,  and  show  a  wonderful  feeling  for  "  connected- 
ness," by  the  way  in  which  they  weave  into  them  the  varied 
experiences  and  interests  of  their  lives. 

They  take  a  special  delight  in  bringing  in  all  the  words 
of  a  study  into  a  complete  story.  This  is  extremely  useful 
as  a  means  of  associating  words  of  like  spelling,  and  its 
value  is  felt  still  more  when  irregular  forms  are  reached. 

In  addition  to  this  embodying  of  words  in  sentences, 
they  are  encouraged  to  make  pictures  of  them,  and  this  is 
especially  helpful  when  they  contain  ideas  that  are  new  to 
them.  (See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  106,  107.) 

These  pictures  are  put  up  for  a  time,  so  that  all  may 
share  in  the  benefit  that  their  schoolfellows  have  conferred 
in  helping  them  to  a  fuller  realisation  of  the  meaning. 

[As  by  the  above  means  each  new  word  will  have  been 
"  realised  "  by  the  children,  only  those  words  which  could 
be  conveniently  utilised  are  introduced  into  the  text  of  the 
Readers.] 

This  real  grasp  of  words  is  very  helpful  in  promoting 
intelligent  reading.  One  can  scarcely  expect  the  children 
to  read  with  expression  if  the  meaning  of  the  words  is  not 
clear  to  them. 

The   sentence    making    also   cultivates   §   readiness   of 


28  On  the  Teaching 

expression,  and  this  greatly  helps  the  later  written  com- 
position.    (See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  162.) 

On  Reading  and  Writing. 
Transition  from  Colour  to  uniform  Black. 

In  the  "  Steps  to  Eeading  "  colour  is  used  throughout ; 
if  the  children  have  thoroughly  mastered  the  work  com- 
prised in  this  book,  they  will  be  prepared  for  the  reading 
of  the  First  Primer,  the  text  of  which  is  in  uniform  black. 
The  studies  heading  the  text  are,  however,  still  in  colour. 
Many  suggestions  for  these  groups  of  words  will  be  found 
in  Chapter  XYI  of  "  Further  Notes." 

The  way  in  which  the  children  handle  the  black  text  is 
described  in  Chapter  XVIII  of  the  same  book. 

Note. — The  children  regard  the  text  as  their  "  undiscovered  country," 
and  they  are  always  anxious  to  explore  it  for  themselves. 

They  much  appreciate  each  new  stop  that  is  introduced 
to  them.  (See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  117-121.) 

A  few  breathing  exercises  at  the  beginning  of  the  lesson 
are  of  great  benefit  to  the  children.  They  all  stand  and 
give  full  play  to  the  lungs  by  drawing  deep  breaths,  taking 
care  to  keep  the  mouth  closed  so  that  the  air  may  be 
inhaled  and  exhaled  through  the  nostrils. 

The  one  standing  to  read  should  take  care  not  to  hold 
the  book  so  high  as  to  intercept  the  voice,  nor  must  the 
chin  be  allowed  to  drop.  The  children  will  probably  be 
able  to  discover  that  this  latter  fault  hinders  the  free  play 
of  the  voice. 

They  listen  most  critically  to  hear  if  their  school- 
fellows pay  due  regard  to  punctuation, 


of  English  Reading  29 

When  a  passage  is  not  read  with  due  expression, 
different  members  of  the  class  are  asked  to  give  their 
rendering  of  it.  They  enter  into  this  with  great  spirit  and 
the  best  rendering  is  quickly  recognised  by  them. 

With  regard  to  provincial  intonation,  the  teacher's  ear 
can  be  the  only  guide,  and  the  children  must  correct  their 
faults  by  listening  to  him  or  her. 

The  children  notice  that  in  many  unaccented  words  and 
syllables,  the  vowels  tend  to  become  reduced  or  even  to 
vanish  completely.  For  instance,  there  is  a  distinct  differ- 
ence in  the  pronunciation  of  "  was  "  in  He  was  seven  years 
old,  No,  he  wasn't ;  and  of  "  had "  in  Had  he  seen  him  ? 
Yes,  he  had  seen  him  many  years  ago. 

The  children  dramatise  the  action  of  these  reduced 
vowels  by  sinking  into  a  chair  as  they  utter  them  (or  as 
they  draw  the  symbol  in  the  air.  Of.  p.  26).  See  Plate  8. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  is  a  tendency  in  colloquial  speech  to 
slur  consonants  (e.g.,  d  of  and;  ng  of  saying;  tin  I  don't  know.) 

It  amuses  the  children  to  be  told  that  the  tongue  did  not  behave 
properly  when  pronouncing  and  (with  slurred  d),  and  they  feel  for 
themselves  that  it  ceased  work  after  producing  n. 

Great  care  should  be  taken  in  correcting  this  faulty 
pronunciation  of  consonants,  and  careful  training  in  sound 
will  make  it  comparatively  rare. 

Attention  is  particularly  drawn  to  this  by  Sir  Q.  W.  Kekewich  in  a 
Circular  to  Training  Colleges  and  Pupil  Teacher  centres,  dated  13th 
December  1897,  which  was  reprinted  in  the  New  Code  for  1898-99. 

"  English  reading  and,  it  may  be  added,  English  speaking,  fail  in 
axidibility  mostly  through  want  of  precision  in  the  consonantal  sounds, 
and  particularly  because  of  the  carelessness  which  allows  the  final  con- 
sonants to  be  corrupted  by  or  assimilated  to  the  initial  consonants  of 
other  words." 


30  On  the  Teaching 

The  *  capital  letters  are  introduced  in  the  Readers  as  they 
are  required,  and  the  children  notice  with  interest  how  the 
small  letters  have  been  developed  from  the  capitals.  (Be/. 

b.) 

They  print  them  in  colour  after  drawing  them  in  the  air. 
(See  p.  23.)  The  simplest  form  is  used.  (See  Plate  3.) 

I  have  found  that  it  is  unwise  to  defer  the  using  of  capitals  where 
they  are  naturally  required.  Children  who  have  read  from  books  in 
which  small  letters  were  used  at  the  beginning  of  sentences,  continue 
to  use  them  later  on,  and  it  is  most  difficult  to  correct  this  habit. 

The  symbols  in  the  Tabulating  Frame  have  the  small 
letter  on  one  side,  the  capital  on  the  other.  The  children 
can  test  their  knowledge  of  the  capital  form  by  first  drawing 
the  capital  asked  for,  and  then  turning  the  small  symbol 
round  to  see  if  the  form  they  have  given  is  correct. 

Note. — In  the  case  of  digraphs  (e.g.  Qu,  Wh,  Ph,  Th,  Sh, 
Ch),  the  children  turn  the  symbol  round  in  order  to  see  the 
initial  capital  letter  (eg.  p  h  cf.  P  h).  They  print  this 
capital  and  the  small  letter  following  it,  as  both  are  required 
to  represent  the  sound  under  consideration. 

When  the  printed  symbols  have  been  thoroughly  mastered 
the  children  pass  on  to  the  written  form.  The  way  in 
which  they  approach  the  latter  is  described  in  Chapter 
XXIII  of  "  Further  Notes." 

*  The  Capitals  are  met  with  for  the  first  time  in  the  following  places  . 
—"Steps  to  Reading"  :  Ph  (p.  9),  B  (p.  15),  P,  black  Th,  T  (p.  16). 
First  and  Second  Primer :  S,  Wh,  D  (Study  1) ;  N,  I,  A  (Study  3) ; 
J  (Study  4) ;  Qu  (Study  5) ;  W  (Study  6)  ;  R  (Study  8) ;  Sh,  Y  (Study 
10) ;  K,  C  (Study  11) ;  M  (Study  12) ;  H,  L  (Study  16)  ;  F  (Study  17) ; 
V  (Study  40) ;  G  (Study  44).  Infant  Reader  :  Blue  Th  (Study  56) ; 
E  (Study  70) ;  O,  U  (Study  74).  X,  Z  and  Ch  will  be  introduced  in 
subsequent  Readers.  (See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  150,  238.) 


of  English  Reading  31 

The  printing  in  colour  is  continued  by  the  children  and 
they  gradually  acquire  the  power  of  turning  a  whole  group 
of  printed  words  into  writing.  (See  "  Further  Notes,"  p. 
135,  lines  22-25,  and  Plates  3,  4,  6,  ibid.) 

(On  Dictation  in  connection  with  the  children's  reading 
books,  see  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  151-161.) 

This  transition  to  the  cursive  character  presents  very 
little  difficulty,  as  the  hand  and  eye  have  gained  so  much 
training  in  the  mastery  of  the  printed  symbols. 

For  Purposes  of  Revision. 

Note. — It  is  important  that  the  children  should  have 
plenty  of  practice  in  going  through  the  sounds  in  the  order 
in  which  they  have  been  taught.  (See  "  Further  Notes," 
p.  88.) 

There  are  many  plans  that  we  have  found  helpful  for 
the  keeping  up  of  acquaintance  with  old  "  friends." 

1.  The   children  are  told  stories  (simple  incidents  of 
every-day   life    and    fairy-tales   are    much    appreciated   by 
them)  during  which  they  show  with  the  pointer  (1)  initial 
sounds,  (2)  vowel  sounds,  (3)  final  sounds,  in  given  words ; 
or  all   the  sounds  of  a  word,  the  word  being  one  which 
contains  no  irregularities. 

(Fuller  details  of  this  kind  of  work  will  be  found  in  pp. 
1 5 1  - 1 5  5  of  "  Further  Notes.") 

2.  A  word  is  sounded  by  one  child  who  chooses  another 
to  point  to  the  symbols  representing  the  sounds. 

3.  Various  words  in  a  story  are  sounded  to  the  children 
who  give  the  result  of  the  sounds  uttered. 

4.  Sounds  are  dictated  to  the  children  who  print  them 


32  On  the  Teaching 

in   succession   on   their  b.b.  or  slates,  and  then  give  the 
whole  word. 

5.  Stories  are  told  and  some  of  the  words  printed. 

6.  One    child   is   asked   to  step   a   given   word  whilst 
another    points   to   the   symbols    representing    the    sounds 
uttered  by  the  "  stepper." 

These  various  practices  enable  the  children  to  give  the 
component  parts  of  long  regular  words  which  they  have 
never  seen. 

(I  have  found  children  of  six  years  old  able  to  point  to 
all  the  symbols  in  astonishment,  punishment,  splendidly, 
without  the  least  indecision,  although  they  had  only  had 
practice  in  words  of  one  syllable.) 

The  Subject  Matter  of  the  Readers. 

The  incidents  in  the  Readers  have  all  been  written  with 
a  view  to  sustaining  interest.  These  incidents  form  a  con- 
nected series,  as  the  children  who  appear  in  them  are 
either  members  of  one  family  or  special  friends  of  the 
members  of  that  family,  and  the  animals  are  their  pets. 

(It  is  a  great  pleasure  to  the  "  readers  "  if  we  make  a 
table  of  the  family  and  decorate  it  with  the  pictures  of  the 
children.  The  details  of  this  will  be  found  in  pp.  130-132 
of  "  Further  Notes.") 

The  various  ages  and  characteristics  of  the  children  are 
touched  upon  in  the  "  Running  Commentary,"  and  short  notes 
are  given  on  the  pet  animals.  The  little  readers  become 
deeply  interested  in  each  new  friend  introduced  to  them. 
Suggestions  are  offered  as  to  where  By-the-way  Talks  can 
be  introduced  in  connection  with  the  "  pets  "  or  incidents  in 


of  English  Reading  33 

the  life  of  our  family.  The  time  at  disposal  will  determine 
how  many  of  the  suggested  lessons  can  be  introduced ;  they 
touch  on  various  subjects  (Nature  lessons,  geography,  arith- 
metic,) and  it  is  hoped  that  it  may  be  found  possible  to 
work  many  of  them  in.  (See  "  Further  Notes,"  pp.  61-70.) 
For  the  convenience  of  teachers  a  list  of  the  above 
suggested  lessons  is  given  on  pp.  168-170.- 

The  *sand-trays  used  for  geographical  modelling  are 
often  enlisted  for  the  purpose  of  illustrating  a  word. 

The  making  of  a  moat  gave  the  children  great  pleasure,  and  much 
ingenuity  was  shown  in  devising  a  drawbridge  (slim  pieces  of  india- 
rubber  proving  very  satisfactory).  This  caused  us  to  travel  back  in 
imagination  to  "  the  olden  times,"  of  which  the  children  are  never  tired 
of  hearing. 

The  unconscious  gratitude  of  the  children  for  the 
widened  interest  that  these  By-the-way  Talks  give,  together 
with  the  increased  scope  to  their  natural  desire  for  "  con- 
nectedness," urges  one  to  weave  them  in  as  far  as  possible, 
apart  from  their  value  in  making  the  subject  the  centre  of 
a  beautiful  whole. 

Kindergarten  songs  might  also  be  introduced  in  connec- 
tion with  the  pet  animals  or  with  the  doings  of  the  family. 
This  constant  intercourse  with  the  pets  of  the  family,  com- 
bined with  the  study  of  their  habits,  will  lead  to  the  gentle 
and  considerate  treatment  of  all  animals. 

In  preparing  the  Headers  it  was  felt  that  the  children  must 
not  be  given  disconnected  sentences  or  meaningless  phrases 
to  read,  as  this  checks  expressive  reading.  They  can  only 
read  with  intelligence  when  they  see  some  logical  sequence. 

*  We  have  found  tin  trays  9x12  in.  a  very  convenient  size  for 
each  child  to  have. 

C 


34  On  the  Teaching  of  English  Reading 

It  is  surprising  how  delighted  the  children  are  to  read 
the  simplest  little  connected  passage.  The  text  of  Study  2 
of  the  First  Primer  was  printed  on  the  black-board,  and 
when  my  little  pupils  arrived  at  the  sentence,  "  The  crab 
got  in  Pat's  cap,"  a  little  child  of  five  years  old  was  over- 
joyed, exclaiming,  "  It  will  pull  Pat's  hair  ! " 

[So  great  was  the  interest  in  that  crab  that  when 
Mr  Walter  Crane  visited  us,  special  requests  were  made  by 
the  children  for  a  sketch  of  it.  The  crab  was  immediately 
drawn  in  the  attitude  desired  (a  claw  just  peeping  out  of 
the  cap)  and  submitted  to  their  approval.  It  is  needless  to 
say  that  it  met  with  the  warmest  reception.] 

In  the  "  Running  Commentary  "  will  be  found,  in  addi- 
tion to  the  notes  and  suggestions  mentioned  above,  complete 
notes  on  word-building  and  lists  of  words  for  stepping, 
arranged  in  two  groups  :  those  marked  H.  (Hearing)  are 
words  in  which  the  ear  may  be  trusted ;  those  marked 
H.  +  S.  (Hearing  and  Sight)  require  the  help  of  the  eye. 
Words  containing  reduced  vowels  (see  p.  29)  are  marked 
with  a  star,  and  note  is  made  of  the  introduction  of  new 
capitals. 


NOTES  ON  THE  EARLY  STAGES 

AND 

A  RUNNING  COMMENTARY 

ON 

STEPS  TO  READING 
THE  FIRST  PRIMER 
THE  SECOND  PRIMER 
THE  INFANT  READER 


ON  THE  EARLY  STAGES. 

THE  work  of  the  Early  Stages  is  fully  described  in  my 
second  Teacher's  Book.  It  will  therefore  only  be  necessary 
to  give  a  few  notes  here  referring  to  the  pages  bearing 
upon  it. 

In  Stage  1  the  children  cultivate  the  spoken  language. 
(See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  5,  6,  13-22.) 

In  Stage  2  they  discover  the  sounds  of  their  speech. 
(See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  6  ;  23-33  ;  40-48.) 

In  Stage  3  they  compare  the  spoken  sounds  and  notice 
that  some  are  breathed  or  voiceless  and  that  others  are 
vibrating  or  voiced.  (See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  34,  35.) 

I  had  a  very  happy  suggestion  from  one  of  the  children,  who  re- 
marked that  the  "  voiceless "  consonants  were  like  little  girls  and  the 
"  voiced  "  like  little  boys.  This  led  to  our  regarding  sounds  such  as  p 
and  b  as  "  sister  "  and  "  brother,"  and  helped  us  with  the  three  sisters 
C 

k  with  the  one  "brother"  g. 
q 

Note. — The  children  have  found  "sister"  and  "brother,"  "girl" 
(e.g.  h)  and  "boy"  (e.g.  P),  so  expressive  of  the  difference  between  the 
breathed  and  vibrating  sounds,  that  I  do  not  use  the  terms  voiced  and 
voiceless  with  them. 

In  Stage  4  they  find  out  how  their  spoken  sounds  are 
produced.  (See  "  Further  Notes,"  pp.  36,  37.) 

See  also  pp.  6,  7,  14,  38,  39  of  "Further  Notes." 


INTRODUCTION  TO  SPEECH  SIGNS. 

BEFORE  the  children  begin  the  "  Steps  to  Beading," 
we  have  a  talk  about  the  use  of  signs.  (See  "  Further 
Notes,"  pp.  51,  52.) 

STEPS    TO  READING. 

COLOUR  has  not  been  introduced  into  the  text  of  the 
Eunning  Commentary,  but  several  coloured  plates  are 
given  at  the  beginning,  to  which  reference  will  be 
made.  For  the  colours  of  the  Consonants  see  Plate  1. 
It  is  most  important  that  colour  should  be  used  through- 
out the  "  Steps  to  Reading  "  and  for  the  "  Studies  "  of  the 
Primers. 

In  connection  with  the  "  Steps  to  Beading,"  see  "  Further 
Notes,"  pp.  7,  8,  9,  52,  56-58. 

Lesson  on  a  Sound  with  its  Sign. 
Steps.     Page  3. 

P 

Note. — See  also  the  Bevised  Lesson  on  a  Sound  with  its 
Sign,  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  53-55. 

1.  A  story  introduces  a  special  word  beginning  with  p 
(e.g.  .pig).       The    story    is    told    in    connection    with    the 
Embroidery  card.     (See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  74,  75.) 

2.  The  children  repeat  the  word  pig  in    chorus,    and 
discover  the  initial  sound. 

37 


38  On  the  Teaching 

3.  They  then  find  out  whether  p  is  a  "  sister "  or  a 
"  brother  "  sound. 

The  experience  already  gained  (see  p.  36)  will  help 
them  to  answer  this  question.  They  try  the  experiments 
suggested  on  p.  18,  and  decide  that  it  is  a  "sister." 

4.  They  are  told  that  there  is  still  another  secret  for 
them  to  find  out.     "  Why  do  the  lips  close  ? " 

(My  little  pupils  like  to  call  the  lips  "  the  front  door.") 

This  suggests  that  something  is  stopped  (or  prevented 
from)  coming  out. 

This  leads  to  the  thought,  "  What  is  there  to  come 
out  ? "  They  will  probably  suggest  breath. 

They  are  then  asked  to  press  the  lips  together,  and  to 
open  them  suddenly,  allowing  the  breath  to  come  out. 
(This  will  give  the  sound  that  is  heard  at  the  beginning  of 
the  word  ^ig.) 

If  they  hold  a  hand  in  front  of  the  mouth  when  doing  this, 
they  will  feel  the  force  with  which  the  breath  is  expelled. 

5.  Having  gained  the  sound,  they  are  asked  to  compare 
it  with  any  sound  they  may  have  heard.     (A  puff-puff.) 

6.  Different  children  are  asked  to  come  out  in  front  of 
the  class  to  utter  p. 

The  children  in  the  class  listen  to  hear  if  correct 
sounds  are  given. 

(This  also  gives  the  teacher  opportunities  for  correcting 
faulty  pronunciation.) 

7.  When  the  children  have  realised  the    sound,  they 
are  introduced  to  the  symbol  representing  it. 

The  simplest  form  of  the  sign  is  taught  (see  type  used 
in  the  "  Steps  to  Heading"). 


of  English  Reading  39 

(The  name  of  the  symbol  is  not  given.     See  p.  15.) 

I  refer  to  our  talk  about  the  use  of  signs  (see  p.  37), 
and  I  then  tell  them  that  we  are  going  to  learn  a  printed 
sign  (or  symbol),  and  whenever  they  see  this  particular  sign 
they  will  know  that  their  lips  must  be  pressed  together 
and  suddenly  opened,  so  as  to  make  the  sound  p  (pig). 

They  are  then  shown  this  wonderful  sign. 

The  symbol  p  (blue)  is  held  up  so  that  all  can  see  it. 
(See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  53,  section  5.) 

8.  A  description  is  gained  from  them.       They  will  be 
sure  to  notice  its  blue  colour,  and  they  are  told  that  all  the 
sister  sounds  will  be  dressed  in  blue. 

9.  I  print  p  on  the  special  b.b.  (see  p.   14)  with  blue 
chalk.     (See  p.  3  of  "  Steps  to  Beading.") 

The  children  draw  in  the  air  as  I  print, 

10.  They  then  practise  drawing  it  in  the  air  with  the 
right  hand. 

11.  This  is  followed  by  their  printing  it  in  blue  chalk 
on  their  b.b.  or  slates  (see  p.  13),  using  the  right  hand. 

They  then  draw  in  the  air  and  print  with  the  left  hand. 
They  also  illustrate  the  "  pet  word." 

1 2.  Now  a  home  must  be  found  for  their  new  "  friend." 

Note. — The  children  regard  each  new  sound  and  each  new  word  as 
a  "friend." 

Being  a  "  front-door  "  sound  (or  lip-letter)  it  will  be  placed 
well  to  the  left.  (See  Plate  1  and  p.  14.)  One  of  the 
children  puts  it  in  its  home.  (See  "  Further  Notes,"  p. 
54,  section  10.) 

They  then  find  p  in  the  "  Steps  to  Beading."  (On  the 
Revision  of  the  Symbols,  see  "Further  Notes/'  p.  88.) 


40  On  the  Teaching 

13.  The  symbol  is  pricked  and  embroidered  in  connec- 
tion with  the  above,  blue  cotton  or  silk  being  used.     On  the 
card  they  find  the  picture  illustrating  the  story  (see  section  1, 
p.  37) :  they  colour  this  picture  as  they  wish,  using  coloured 
pencil  chalks.     (See  p.  24  and  Note,  p.  49.) 

(These  cards  are  very  useful  as  a  record  of  the  lesson 
and  also  for  revising  the  symbols.  See  "  Further  Notes," 
pp.  71-73.) 

14.  The  children  practise  printing  the  symbol  in  books. 
They  use  blue  pencil  chalks  and  print  with  right  and  left 
hand.      (See   Children's   Work,  I,   and  "Further  Notes," 
p.  83.) 

Before  passing  on  to  the  learning  of  a  new  symbol  I  ask 
the  children  to  give  me  a  complete  lesson  on  the  above.  I 
am  supposed  to  come  from  a  far  away  land,  and  I  am  only 
allowed  to  know  the  names  of  my  "  teachers."  Having  been 
thoroughly  instructed,  the  children  draw  pictures  illustrating 
words  beginning  with  p. 


This  sound,  being  the  "  brother "  of  p,  is  taken  next. 
(See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  74,  75.) 

A  story  is  told  introducing  the  word  bag.  The  sound 
is  evolved  in  the  same  way  as  p  (see  p.  37,  sections  1-14). 

Experiments  lead  the  children  to  decide  that  it  is  a 
"  brother "  sound.  They  will  notice  its  black  dress  (see 
sections  7,  8),  and  they  are  told  that  brother  sounds  will  be 
dressed  in  block  (on  a  white  surface).  When  we  use  the 
black-board  the  brothers  wear  white  sailor  suits.  (See 


CHILDREN'S  WORK 


ORIGINAL  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


I.  See  p.  40.                                PRINTING. 

0.  L., 

A  beginner                       Printed  with  left  hand, 
of  6  yrs. 

Printed  with  right  hand. 

J 

D 

') 

0 

P 

P 

7) 

~] 

1 

I 

:) 

J 

') 

3 

II.  See  p.  56. 

V.  0.  Printed  with  left  hand. 

9  yrs 


Printed  with  right  hand. 


III.  See  p.  101. 

M.P. 

6  yrs.  Printed  with  left  hand. 


PRINTING.  A  "  party  "  of  words. 

Printed  with  right  hand. 


te 


i 


- 

c  duT'A  n       c  du  rn  D 

1 

i 

For  Dictation,  Writing,  and  more  advanced  work,  see 
Plates  I.-VII.  of  "Further  Notes." 


of  English  Reading  41 

p.  19.)  The  home  of  b  (see  section  12)  is  under  its 
sister  p,  as  the  lips  are  used  in  a  similar  manner. 

The  two  sounds  are  compared  and  also  the  two  symbols. 
The  children  notice  that  the  rounded  part  of  each  is  on  the 
right-hand  side. 

(This  similarity  between  p  and  its  brother  b  has 
prevented  confusion  between  b  and  d.) 

t 

A  story  is  told  about  the  puppy  who  had  a  bath  in  the 
fab.  (See  General  Remarks,  p.  75  of  "Further  Notes.") 

See  pp.  37-40.  The  children  discover  that  t  is  a 
"sister"  and  must  be  dressed  in  blue.  They  find  that 
the  tongue  touches  the  ridge  above  the  teeth  (see  p.  19). 
Its  home  (section  12)  will  be  to  the  right  of  p,  as  the 
sound  is  produced  inside  the  mouth.  (See  Plate  1.) 

d 

This  sound  is  the  "  brother  "  of  t.  The  lesson  proceeds 
as  on  pp.  37-40. 

A  story  is  told  about  a  dog.    (See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  65.) 

Being  a  brother  sound,  it  is  dressed  in  black.  Its  home 
is  under  its  sister  t.  (See  Plate  1.) 

On  the  printing  of  d,  see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  82. 

C 

A  story  is  told  about  a  cat.     (See  card,  and  pp.  37-40.) 

The  children  discover  that  C  is  a  sister  sound.     They 

find  that  the  tongue  rises  at  the  back  of  the  mouth  and 

touches  the  roof  (see  p.  19).    The  home  of  C  must  therefore 

be  far  back  in  the  Frame,  to  the  right  of  t.     (See  Plate  1.) 


42  On  the  Teaching 

In  describing  the  symbol  the  children  remarked  that  it  was  round, 
like  a  "  fat  baby."     This  has  helped  them  to  distinguish  between  the 

C 
three  sisters  k 


A  story  is  told  of  a  little  boy  who  dressed  up  as  a  king 
(see  card  and  pp.  37-40).  The  children  recognise  the  sound 
as  an  old  friend,  but  they  are  told  that  in  some  words  they 
will  find  another  sign  (or  symbol)  used  for  that  sound. 
For  the  home  of  k,  see  Plate  1. 

The  children  named  this  symbol  "  the  tall  sister." 

q 

A  story  is  told  about  a  duck  which  was  always  saying 
"  $uack  !  <?uack  !  <?uack  i»  (gee  Q^^  an(j  p^  37-40.) 

The  children  find  the  first  sound  in  the  word  gnack,  and 
they  hear  that  q  has  the  same  sound  as  C  and  k,  so  that 
they  now  have  three  "  sisters." 

It  interests  them  to  compare  the  symbols  C  and  q. 
They  notice  that  each  of  these  two  "  sisters  "  is  rounded  to 
the  left :  this  leads  to  comparison  with  p  and  b  (see  p.  41). 

They  are  told  that  this  third  sister  always  wants  a 
certain  little  friend  to  sit  next  to  her. 

This  led  to  their  calling  q  the  "  cry-baby  "  of  the  three  sisters. 

As  this  favourite  companion  (u)  takes  the  sound  of  w 
when  it  follows  q,  the  children  will  not  be  given  the 
digraph  q  U  until  page  9  of  the  "  Steps "  is  reached. 
By  that  time  they  will  have  learnt  both  W  and  u.  (See 
Note,  p.  60.) 


of  English  Reading  43 

Note. — q  is  hung  on  the  Tabulating  Frame  (see  "  Steps 
to  Reading,"  p.  3)  until  the  digraph  q  U  is  taught. 


g 

A  story  is  told  about  the  boys  who  went  for  a  drive  in 
the  gig,  (See  card  and  pp.  37-40.) 

g  is  regarded  as  the  proud  little  brother  of  the  three 
sisters  above. 

The  children  discover  that  the  tongue  behaves  in  a 
similar  manner  for  g  as  for  C  (see  p.  41  and  Plate  1). 

They  have  now  put  all  the  symbols  heading  page  3  of 
the  Steps  (except  a)  in  their  home  in  the  Tabulating  Frame. 

Having  learnt  the  above  sounds,  classed  as  stops  or 
explosives,  and  having  had  exercise  in  finding  the  "  brother  " 
sound  when  a  "  sister  "  is  given  and  vice  versa,  one  might 
draw  the  attention  of  the  children  to  the  fact  that,  though 
they  have  such  a  number  of  new  "  friends  "  (see  Note,  p.  39), 
they  cannot  build  a  word.  This  leads  to  the  necessity  of 
our  introducing  a  sound  of  a  very  privileged  order. 


A  story  is  told  introducing  the  word  bat  (see  card  and 
pp.  37-40).  The  children  discover  the  sound  in  the  middle 
of  this  word.  (See  Note,  p.  73  of  "  Further  Notes.") 

Having  gained  a,  they  are  led  to  notice  that  it  has  a 
much  freer  passage  than  the  other  sounds  they  have  learnt. 
(Cf.  the  way  in  which  the  "  stops  "  had  to  force  their  way 
out.) 


44  On  the  Teaching 

They  discover  that  a  is  a  "  brother,"  but  when  the  sign 
is  shown,  they  notice  that  it  is  dressed  in  red.  This  is  to 
mark  it  as  a  person  of  great  importance  (see  p.  19.) 

On  the  stepping  of  a,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  124. 

They  feel  (see  p.  1 9)  that  the  tongue  is  low  for  a ;  its 
home  will  therefore  be  in  the  "  downstairs "  part  of  the 
dwellings  reserved  for  the  vowels.  (See  Plate  2.) 

As  soon  as  it  joins  the  "  friends  "  they  already  possess, 
they  will  be  able  to  build  words.  (See  Steps,  p.  3.) 

In  the  picture  on  the  left-hand  page  they  will  find 
charming  illustrations  of  these  words. 

First  Lesson  in  Word  Building. 

The  children  have  now  learnt  the  sounds  classed  as 
stops,  and  the  short  vowel  sound  a  (as  in  bat),  and  the 
symbols,  which  head  page  3  of  the  "  Steps,"  are  all  hanging 
in  their  places  in  the  Tabulating  Frame. 

On  the  revision  of  these  symbols  see  "  Further  Notes," 
p.  88. 

Before  learning  any  more  signs,  the  children  use  those 
they  already  know  for  building  the  words  of  groups  1-6.  • 

On  Nature  Talks  and  on  Stories  introducing  words,  see 
"  Further  Notes,"  Chapters  X  and  XII. 

1.  A  story  is  told  introducing  the  word,  e.g.  tap.     (See 
picture  in  "  Steps,"  p.  2  ;  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  77  and  p.  97, 
section  1.) 

2.  The  word  is  repeated  in  chorus. 

3.  The    children    discover    and   personate  the  sounds. 
(See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  97,  98,  sections  3,  4,  5.) 


of  English  Reading  45 

4.  Each  utters  his  sound  (see  "Further  Notes,"  p.   98, 
sec.  6). 

5.  They  take  down  the  symbols  for  their  sounds  (see 
"Further  Notes,"  p.  98,  sec.  7.) 

6.  All  sound  tap,  giving  the  result  tap. 

Great  care  is  taken  to  produce  each  sound  clearly,  com- 
pletely finishing  one  before  beginning  the  next. 

The  uttering  of  the  separate  sounds  of  a  word  is  regarded  as  being 
similar  to  "  taking  distance  "  in  drill.  The  pronouncing  of  the  com- 
plete word  is  regarded  as  "  close  rank." 

For  dramatic  separation  of  sound  see  p.  21. 

7.  The  word  having  been  sounded  in  chorus,  individual 
children  are  asked  to  show  that  they  can  sound  and  step  it 
(see  p.   25),   whilst  their    little   friends   listen  to   hear  if 
correct  sounds  are  given. 

See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  124  (&). 

8.  Dramatic  action  adds  immensely  to  their  pleasure, 
and  they  delight  in  turning  on  imaginary  "  taps  "  in  any 
part  of  the  room. 

9.  I  then  print  the  word  tap  on  the  special  black- 
board.    (See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  99,  section  10.) 

For  colours,  see  p.  3  of  "  Steps  to  Beading." 

10.  This  is  followed  by  their  printing  it  with  coloured 
chalks  on  their  black-boards,  practising  with  right  and  left 
hand  alternately. 

See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  99,  section  11. 

11.  The  children  make  original  pictures  to  illustrate 
the  word. 

12.  They    then    open     their     "Steps     to    Beading," 
page    3,   and   see   if    they   can  find   the   word   they   have 
built.     They  look  for  an  illustration  of  it  in  the  picture 


46 


On  the  Teaching 


on    the    left-hand   page.     (See   "Further    Notes,"  p.    99, 
section  13.) 

13.  At  the  end  of  the  lesson  each  symbol  is  put  back 
in  its  place  in  the  Frame  by  the  children. 

14.  In   a   later  lesson   they  print  the   word   in  their 
printing  books  with  right  and  left  hand  and  they  illustrate 
it.     (See  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  99,  section  15.) 

See  Children's  Work,  II,  facing  p.  40. 


Children's  Work,  II. 

A  story  was  told  about  Harry's  father  (see  "Steps  to  Reading, 
p.  2,  and  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  78),  who  found  that  he  would  not  be 
able  to  catch  his  train,  if  he  walked  to  the  station.      He  therefore 
took  a  cab  and  arrived  just  in  time. 

The  word  cab  was  handled  in  the  manner  suggested  in  pp.  44-46 
(see  sections  1-13). 

The  children  afterwards  printed  cab  in  colour  and  illustrated  it 
in  their  Word  book.     Plate  II.  shows  the  arrangement  of  this  book. 


On  Black-board  Recorders. 

The  children  take  great  interest  in  helping  to  record 
the  work  on  the  special  b.b.  At  this  early  stage  they  print 
the  sign  or  word  under  the  teacher's. 

See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  108. 


On  Identifying  the  Words  in  the  Steps. 

It  is  important  that  the  children  should  identify  the 
signs  and  words  in  the  "  Steps  to  Reading  "  after  they  have 
handled  them  as  suggested  in  pp.  37-40  and  pp.  44-46. 


of  English  Reading  47 

They  look  forward  to  hunting  for  the  signs  or  words, 
and  the  pictures  illustrating  them  are  a  source  of  great 
pleasure. 

On  Revision. 

We  refer  to  the  word  or  words  built  in  the  previous 
lesson  and  the  children  revise  each  as  suggested  on  p.  86 
of  "Further  Notes"  (see  Note  on  Revision:  see  also  p.  85, 
ibid.). 

For  the  building  of  the  remaining  groups  of  words  in 
the  "Steps,"  see  pp.  44-46,  and  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  76, 
97-102. 

For  the  words  cap  and  gap,  see  "  Further  Notes," 
p.  77. 

Page  3,  group  2. — b,  brother  to  p,  is  taken  as  the  final 
consonant.     (See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  77,  78.) 

Page  3,  group  3. — t  is  used  finally. 

Page  3,  group  4. — d,  brother  to  t,  is  used  finally.  (See 
"Further  Notes,"  p.  66.) 

Page  3,  group  5. — c  k  is  taken  finally. 

C  k  is  regarded  as  the  regular  doubling  of  k.  Double 
letters  (which  are  printed  in  the  same  colour)  are  sounded 
once  only,  and  the  attention  of  the  children  is  called  to  the 
important  work  that  the  eye  has  to  do  in  helping  the  ear. 
In  words  like  pack  they  hear  only  three  sounds,  but  the 
eye  sees  four  letters ;  they  therefore  recognise  that  the  eye 
and  the  ear  must  be  very  great  friends. 

C 

They  are  told  that  the  first  two  of  the  three  sisters  k 

q 


48  On  the  Teaching 

are  very  fond  of  being  together  at  the  end  of  words  which 
take  one  step. 

(They  are  greatly  amused  at  the  "  fat  baby,"  C,  going 
for  a  walk  with  the  "  tall  sister,"  k.) 

Note. — In  building  these  words,  the  two  "  sisters  "  (c  k) 
are  taken  down  by  one  child,  as  the  sound  is  heard  once  only. 
In  sounding  them,  the  k  is  drawn  in  the  air. 

Page  3,  group  6. — g,  the  proud  little  "brother,"  with 
the  feather  in  his  cap,  being  the  happy  possessor  of  three 

C 
"  sisters,"  k,  is  taken  as  the  final  consonant. 

q 

m 

Before  proceeding  to  group  7  of  page  3  a  new  symbol 
has  to  be  taught,  m. 

A  story  is  told  about  the  two  little  children  who  were 
sitting  on  a  mat.  (See  card  and  "Further  Notes,"  p.  78, 
lines  11,  12.) 

The  sound  is  evolved  as  in  the  lesson  on  pp.  37-40. 

As  it  is  a  "boy"  sound  (see  p.  36),  a  black  dress  is 
chosen. 

The  children  will  find  that  it  is  a  "  front  door "  sound, 
so  that  it  will  have  to  live  in  the  same  column  as  p  and  b. 

Then  they  find  the  difference  between  m  and  p. 

They  soon  discover  that  the  sound  can  be  made  without 
the  opening  of  the  mouth,  and  that  it  can  be  prolonged. 

Eemembering  that  for  p  the  mouth  was  opened  to  allow 
the  breath  to  come  out,  the  question  arises,  "  What  happens 
in  the  case  of  m  ?  How  does  the  breath  get  out  ? " 

One  of  the  children  will  probably  suggest  its  coming 
through  the  nose. 


of  English  Reading  49 

To  prove  this,  they  pinch  their  noses,  and  try  to  make 
the  sound. 

Its  nasal  character  being  proved,  we  call  it  a  nose 
sound. 

Though  the  "  home  "  of  m  is  in  the  same  column  as  p 
and  b,  it  is  separated  from  them,  as  it  is  distinguished  by 
using  the  nose  as  well  as  the  lips.  (See  Plate  1.) 

It  will  interest  the  children  to  consider  any  sound  that 
ITI  suggests  (humming). 

The  difficulty  of  producing  this  sound  clearly  when 
suffering  from  a  cold  in  the  head  (b  being  produced  instead 
of  m)  will  also  interest  them,  and  they  will  probably 
discover  the  reason. 

In  the  next  lesson  this  new  "  friend  "  is  used  for  building. 

In  group  7  it  appears  initially,  as  the  words  thus  gained 
are  of  a  more  useful  kind. 

For  the  building  of  these  words  see  pp.  44-46. 

Note. — The  age  of  the  children  and  the  time  at  disposal 
[will  sometimes  make  it  advisable  to  devote  two  lessons  to  a 
'new  symbol.  In-  this  case  it  is  taught  in  the  first  lesson 
and  embroidered  afterwards,  revised  in  the  second  (see 
!p.  40)  and  printed  later  in  the  Sound  book.  (See  "  Further 

Notes,"  p.  83.) 

1« .  . 

h 

Page  3,  group  8. — For  this  the  symbol  n  must  be 
taught. 

The  children  are  told  a  story  about  a  fisherman  with 
his  wet.  (See  card.) 

See  General  Eemarks,  p.  *75  of  "  Further  Notes." 

D 


50  On  the  Teaching 

The  lesson  proceeds  as  on  pp.  37-40. 

The  children  decide  that  n  must  wear  a  black  dress 

(Cf.  m,  p.  48.) 

They  repeat  n  in  chorus  and  try  to  find  out  wha 
the  tongue  does  to  make  the  sound.  (See  p.  19,  linei 
16-24.) 

They  discover  that  the  tongue  touches  the  ridge  abov 
the  upper  teeth.     This  leads  to  comparison  with  t  and  ( 
and  decides  its  being  placed  in  the  same  column  in  the 
Frame. 

Now  the  difference  must  be  discovered.  They  will 
gladly  make  the  experiment  resorted  to  in  the  previous 
lesson  and  they  will  find  out  that  it  is  a  nose  sound. 

n  must  therefore  have  a  "home"  to  itself.  (Cf.  m, 
p.  49  and  see  Plate  1.) 

The  words  of  group  8  are  built  in  later  lessons.  (See 
"Further  Notes,"  p.  66,  lines  2,  3.) 

ng 

Next  comes  the  teaching  of  the  digraph  ng. 

A  story  is  told  introducing  the  word  ba.ng.  (See 
Embroidery  card  and  pp.  37-40.) 

The  children  are  asked  to  discover  the  sound  at  the  end  of 
this  word.  The  practice  that  they  have  already  had  in 
finding  final  sounds  will  enable  them  to  do  this  quite  easily. 
(See  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  27,  28.) 

Having  gained  the  sound  represented  by  ng,  they 
consider  its  dress  and  its  home. 

They  decide  that  it  must  be  dressed  in  black. 

They    discover    that    the    tongue    rises    at    the    back 


of  English  Reading  51 

of  the  mouth  and  touches  the  roof  (cf.  c,  g).  They  also 
find  that  the  nose  is  used  (cf.  m,  n). 

ng  must  therefore  have  a  home  to  itself  in  the  same 
column  as  g  and  his  three  sisters.  (See  Plate  1.) 

When  ng  is  shown,  the  children  notice  that  the  symbols 
look  like  old  friends,  but  when  taken  together  as  we  now 
have  them  in  our  digraph,  they  have  one  sound  only. 

In  a  later  lesson  it  is  used  for  building,  the  symbols 
being  taken  down  in  the  following  order : — 

1.  b 

2.  a 

3.  ng 

On  Revision. 

Before  proceeding  to  p.  5  of  the  "  Steps,"  the  children 
may  like  to  recall  the  stories  told  in  connection  with  the 
pictures  on  p.  2,  and  to  sound  and  point  to  the  words  of 
p.  3  that  they  use. 

As  by  the  above  means  they  will  be  proceeding  from 
speech  to  sign,  they  will  probably  be  equal  to  the  work 
suggested. 

On  Speech  to  Sign,  see  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  85-87. 

On  the  Revision  of  the  Symbols  „  p.  88. 

On  Dictation  „  p.  153. 

Steps.     Page  5. 
i 

The  new  symbol  to  be  taught  is  I  (ill.)  A  story  is  told 
about  the  little  girl  who  was  ill  (see  card). 

The  children  discover  the  sound  i.     (See  pp.  37-40.) 


52  On  the  Teaching 

The  usual  experiments  (see  p.  18)  lead  them  to  decide 
that  it  is  a  "  brother." 

By  looking  at  each  other  as  they  utter  i,  they  will  see 
that  the  "  front  door  "  is  open,  and  by  putting  a  finger  in 
the  mouth  they  will  feel  that,  though  the  tongue  rises,  it  is 
not  so  high  as  to  hinder  the  breath  on  its  way  "  out  of  doors." 

Therefore  all  points  to  this  sound  being  ranked  amongst 
the  very  important  ones,  clothed  in  red.  (Cf.  a,  p.  44.) 

(This  sound  requires  especial  care  as  there  is  a  tendency 
to  confuse  it  with  e  as  in  egg.) 

The  symbol  is  shown.  (See  p.  38,  sections  7  to  14.)  Its 
home  is  chosen,  suggestions  being  invited  from  the  children. 
Being  produced  so  near  the  lips,  it  is  placed  well  to  the  left. 
As  the  tongue  is  higher  for  i  (ill)  than  for  a  (bat),  j  is 
placed  higher  up  than  a  (See  Vowel  Table,  Plate  2.) 

If  the  children  repeat  a  (as  in  bat) 

i  (as  in  til) 

several  times  in  succession,  the  difference  in  the  production 
of  these  sounds  will  be  very  marked. 

On  the  Stepping  of  a  Vowel,  see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  124. 

Page  5,  groups  1,  2,  p  and  b  are  used  as  the  final 
sounds.  See  pp.  44-46. 

In  connection  with  page  5,  see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  66 
and  Note  on  p.  65. 

y 

Before  taking  the  words  of  group  3,  the  children  are 
taught  the  symbol  y. 

A  story  is  told  about  kitty  (see  card)  and  the  lesson 
proceeds  as  on  pp.  37-40. 


of  English  Reading  53 

The  children  notice  that  the  sound  of  y  (kitty)  is 
similar  to  that  of  i  (ill).  For  its  home,  see  Plate  2. 

Page  5,  group  3. — t  is  used  finally.     (See  pp.  44-46.) 

The  first  two  words  having  been  built,  the  word  pity 
gives  an  opportunity  for  the  use  of  the  new  friend  y. 

This  tailed  y,  sitting  at  the  end  of  the  word,  interests 
the  children  very  much. 

(They  will  find  that  their  kitty  in  the  picture 
connected  with  the  embroidering  of  y  (see  p.  24)  also 
wears  a  long  tail.) 

On  the  stepping  of  pity,  see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  125. 

Page  5,  group  4. — d  is  used  as  the  final  consonant. 
For  the  building  of  groups  4-9,  see  pp.  44-46. 

Page  5,  group  5. — ck  is  used  finally.    (See  pp.  47, 48.) 
„        group  6. — g  is  used  as  the  final  consonant, 
group  7. — m 

group  8. — n          „  „ 

group  9. — ng       „  „ 

On  recording  the  work,  see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  108. 

The  children  have  thoroughly  revised  all  the  conson- 
antal friends  of  p.  3,  as  the  progression  has  been  in 
accordance  with  the  Table  of  Consonants  (see  p.  172). 
The  new  vowel  sound  has  given  a  fresh  set  of  words. 

For  the  revision  of  these,  see  p.  51. 

Steps.     Page  7. 
I 

The  new  symbol  to  be  taught  is  I.       A  story  is  told 
about  a  lily  (see  card  and  "  Further  Notes,"  pp.  62,  66). 
See  pp.  37-40, 


54  On  the  Teaching 

The  children  decide  that  I  must  be  dressed  in  black. 

They  consider  what  the  tongue  does  in  order  to  make 
this  sound.  They  find  that  the  front  of  the  tongue  rises  to 
the  "  ridge."  This  leads  to  comparison  with  t,  d,  and  n. 
The  sound  can  be  prolonged,  for  the  tongue  is  not  suddenly 
withdrawn  as  in  the  case  of  t  and  d.  In  making  I  they 
will  find  that  the  breath  does  not  escape  through  the  nose 
as  in  the  case  of  n.  They  will  probably  wish  to  prove  this 
point  by  pinching  the  nose  and  they  will  hear  that  I  is 
uninfluenced  by  this  action. 

This  leads  to  the  question  "  How  does  the  breath 
escape  ? " 

Some  one  may  suggest  that  it  comes  out  at  the  sides  of 
the  tongue,  and  they  put  a  finger  at  each  side  to  see  if  they 
can  feel  it. 

As  the  tongue  rises  to  the  "ridge"  (see  p.  50)  the 
children  will  wish  I  to  have  a  home  under  n  (see-  Plate  1). 

Page  7,  group  1. — I  is  used  as  the  initial  sound,  and 
the  vowel  a  is  the  red  friend. 

For  Suggested  Talks  in  connection  with  page  7,  see 
11  Further  Notes,"  p.  66. 

Page  7,  group  2. — The  vowel  i  is  used. 

On  ck  in  the  word  lick,  see  pp.  47,  48. 

The  word  lily  brings  in  the  use  of  the  tailed  y. 

r 

The  symbol  P  is  now  taught. 

A  story  is  told  about  a  water  rat.  (See  card  and  pp. 
37-40.) 

The  children  repeat  the  word  rat  and  they  are 
encouraged  to  roll  the  r  in  order  to  find  out  what  happens. 


of  English  Reading  55 

The  lesson  proceeds  as  suggested  in  pp.  37-40. 

The  initial  sound  is  discovered  and  the  children  decide 
that  the  dress  must  be  black. 

They  find  that  the  tongue  rises  in  the  front  part  of  the 
mouth. 

This  will  lead  them  to  choose  a  "  home  "  under  I . 

P  is  used  as  the  initial  sound  in  the  words  of  groups 
3  and  4,  p.  7. 

For  the  word  rack,  see  Note  on  p.  48. 

Note. — In  building,  p  will  not  be  used  after  vowels  for 
some  time.  As  it  plays  so  important  a  part  in  modifying 
the  vowels  which  it  follows,  I  have  thought  it  wiser  to 
defer  these  forms  until  a  later  stage.  (See  "  Further  Notes," 
p.  178.) 

Page  7,  group  4. — Words  containing  i  are  built. 

Page  7,  group  5. — The  story  introduces  the  word  ill 
(see  p.  44),  and  when  the  children  have  discovered  the 
sounds,  they  are  told  that  in  a  great  many  words  which 
take  one  step  (see  p.  25)  two  little  brothers  like  to  appear, 
though  the  sound  I  is  heard  once  only.  (Of.  c  k,  "  Steps," 
pp.  3,  5,  7.) 

They  will  again  see  how  friendly  the  eye  must  be 
in  helping  to  get  these  words  safely  built. 

The  symbols  are  taken  down  by  the  children  in  the 
following  order  : — 

1.  i          )     The    two    symbols    I  I   are  taken 

2.  II      f  down  together  by  one  child. 
Note. — The  children  draw  the  second  I  in  the  air  when 

they  sound  or  step  words  of  this  kincj. 


56  On  the  Teaching 

When  the  symbols  have  been  taken  "  home,"  the  story 
continues  and  introduces  the  next  word  of  group  5.  The 
class  watch  very  attentively  to  see  whether  the  builders 
remember  the  double  sign. 

Cf.  Note  on  p.  80,  and  see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  100, 
lines  4-12. 

When  p.  7  has  been  worked  through,  the  children  may 
like  to  talk  about  the  picture  facing  it  and  to  point  to  some 
of  the  words  that  they  use  in  their  chat.  (See  Notes  on 
Eevision,  p.  51.) 

In  the  building  of  the  words  of  page  7  the  children  will 
have  had  opportunities  of  revising  the  consonants  already 
learnt,  and  of  using  the  vowels  a  (bat)  and  i  (ill). 

Steps.     Page  9. 
h 

The  new  symbol  to  be  taught  is  h. 

Note. — A  lesson  is  given  on  h  here,  though  it  is  placed 
later  in  the  Table  of  Consonants.  (See  Plate  1.)  As  the 
symbol  h  appears  in  several  digraphs  (w  h,  p  h,  t  h, 
S  h,  C  h),  it  is  taught  previous  to  them. 

For  Suggested  Talks  in  connection  with  page  9,  see 
"Further  Notes,"  p.  67. 

A  story  is  told  introducing  the  word  Aen.  It  is 
associated  with  Betty,  who  was  feeding  her  hens  (see  card). 

The  usual  experiments  lead  the  children  to  decide  that 
h  must  wear  a  blue  dress. 

The  lesson  continues  as  on  pp.  37-40. 

All  sound   h,   h,   h,  and  are  asked  if  it  suggests  any 


of  English  Reading  57 

sound  they  have  heard.     (Panting  of  a  dog,  or  puffing  of 
an  engine.) 

As  it  is  practically  unobstructed  breath,  it  cannot  well 
be  classified  with  any  of  the  other  sounds.  It  therefore  has 
a  home  all  to  itself,  far  back  in  the  Frame.  (See  Plate  1.) 

(The  children  were  quite  touched  with  its  lonely  lot,  and  remarked, 
"  Poor  little  h  !     She's  sighing  because  she's  an  only  child.") 

Page  9,  groups  1,  2.  —  h  is  used  initially. 

For  building,  see  pp.  44-46. 

For  II  in  group  2,  see  Note,  p.  55. 


Note.  —  W  h  (wAip).    See  blue  w  +  yellow  h.    Plate  1. 

This  digraph  is  put  in  the  Table  of  Consonants,  as  some 
people  prefer  to  pronounce  a  breathed  (not  voiced)  sound. 
Those  who  wish  to  teach  this  will  use  blue  W  +  yellow  h 
instead  of  black  W  +  yellow  h  (see  Plate  1). 

The  lesson  proceeds  as  on  pp.  37-40. 

See  also  notes  on  w  h,  pp.  58,  59. 

W 

The  new  sound,  w,  is  introduced  in  a  story  about  the 
two  children  who  put  up  their  umbrella  lest  they  should 
get  wet.  (See  Embroidery  card  and  pp.  37-40.) 

See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  76. 

The  children  discover  that  w  is  a  brother  and  must  be 
dressed  in  black. 

They  next  find  out  how  it  is  produced.  As  it  is  a 
"  front  door  "  sound,  this  will  be  an  easy  matter.  (See  p.  19 
and  Plate  1.)  As  the  lips  are  used,  w  is  placed  in 


58  On  the  Teaching 

the  same  column  as  the  other  lip  sounds,  but  it  is  divided 
from  them  because  of  its  character  as  a  continuant. 

On  the  printing  of  W,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  82. 

Page  9,  group  3. — In  the  next  lesson  the  word  wag 
is  built.  (See  p.  44.) 

Page  9,  group  4. — The  vowel  i  (ill)  is  used  and  w  is 
the  initial  sound. 

w  h 

W  h  (whip).  (See  black  w  +  yellow  h,  Plate  1.) 
A  story  introduces  the  word  whip  (see  card  and  pp.  37-40). 

The  children  discover  the  initial  sound.  They  decide 
that  it  is  a  brother  and  must  be  dressed  in  black. 

They  notice  that  the  sound  is  similar  to  W  (wet),  but 
they  are  told  that,  in  the  new  symbol,  W  has  a  silent 
"  friend  "  sitting  next  to  it. 

They  await  the  appearance  of  the  digraph  W  h  with 
great  interest,  and  quickly  notice  yellow  h.  (This  is 
drawn  in  the  air.) 

Yellow  was  chosen  as  being  suggestive  of  something 
that  had  faded  away  (autumn  leaves).  The  use  of  this 
colour  invests  all  the  words,  containing  silent  letters,  with 
interest  to  the  children,  and  they  are  welcomed  with 
the  greatest  delight,  so  that  what  had  hitherto  been  a 
stumbling-block  is  now  a  source  of  joy.  Any  little  girl  or 
boy  possessing  a  name  containing  silent  letters  is  regarded 
aa  a  highly-favoured  personage. 

The  pronunciation  given  on  this  page  is  the  one  that  I 
teach  first,  as  it  is  very  general  in  the  south  of  England. 


of  English  Reading  59 

Later  on,  the  children  are  introduced  to  the  pronunciation 
as  described  on  p.  57.  (It  is  advisable  to  give  this  lesson 
before  passing  on  to  page  1 1  of  the  "  Steps.") 

These  digraphs  are  revised  as  suggested  in  pp.  89  and 
90  of  "  Further  Notes." 

It  will  be  noticed  that  h  is  yellow  in  each  of  them. 
This  is  because  the  sound  of  h  does  not  follow  w. 

Page  9,  group  5. — In  building  the  word  whip  the 
symbols  are  taken  down  in  the  following  order : — 

1.  w  h 

2.  i 

3.  p 

u 

The  children  are  now  taught  the  symbol  u  (pwll). 

A  story  is  told  of  Bobby,  whose  dog  tried  to  pull  him 
from  the  rug  (see  card  and  pp.  37-40). 

The  children  discover  the  middle  sound  U. 

They  now  consider  how  this  sound  is  made.  The 
"  front  door  "  is  open,  though  not  very  wide,  yet  u  manages 
to  get  out  without  being  hindered.  This,  with  the  vibration 
of  the  vocal  chords  (see  pp.  18,  19)  decides  its  joining  the 
important  people  dressed  in  red. 

By  putting  a  finger  as  far  back  in  the  mouth  as  possible, 
they  will  find  that  the  back  part  of  the  tongue  rises.  It  is 
owing  to  this  behaviour  of  the  tongue  that  we  place  U  (as 
in  pwll)  high  up,  and  well  to  the  right,  in  the  Frame.  (See 
Plate  2.) 

Note, — The  change  of  tongue  position  is  very  noticeable. 


60  On  the  Teaching 

if  the  children  place  a  finger  in  the  mouth  and  repeat 

a  (as  in  bat) 

U  (as  in  pwll)  several  times  in  succession. 

(The  sound  u  (pwll)  is  taken  before  that  of  u  (mwff) 

as  the  former  is  like  the  sound  so  frequently  met  with  in 

foreign  languages.)     See  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  124  (a). 

Page  9,  groups  6,  7.     For  building  these,  see  p.  44. 

qu 

q  u  (quack)  introduces  the  "  cry-baby  "  q  with  its  in- 
separable red  friend,  u.  (See  pp.  37-40.) 

Reference  is  made  to  the  story  of  p.  42. 

Note. — As  the  children  have  now  learnt  w  (see  groups 
3,  4  of  page  9)  they  will  be  familiar  with  the  sound 
that  U  takes  when  it  follows  q.  They  have  also  learnt 
the  symbol  U,  and  it  interests  them  very  much  to  find 
that  this  red  friend,  when  sitting  next  to  q,  takes  the 
sound  w.  q  U  is  henceforth  treated  as  a  digraph  and 
sounded  as  q  W. 

q  is  taken  down  from  the  Frame  by  one  of  the  children 
and  q  U  takes  its  place.  (See  Plate  1,  and  Note,  p.  43.) 

The  children  print  q  u  (jwack)  in  their  Sound  books. 

The  word  in  group  8  is  built  as  follows : — 

/  3.   The  two  symbols  are  taken  down 

2.  a  > 

(  by  one  child. 

3.  ck ) 

Page  9,  group  9.     This  group  gives  the  children  further 
opportunities  for  using  q  U.     See  Note  on  p.  80. 

It  is  advisable  to  let  them  print  each  of  the  words  of 
groups  8  and  9  in  their  Word  books. 


of  English  Reading  61 


The  new  symbol  is  f.  A  story  is  told  about  a  fish 
(see  card  and  pp.  37-40). 

The  children  discover  that  f  is  a  sister,  and  must 
therefore  be  in  blue. 

They  find  that  the  top  teeth  rest  lightly  on  the  lower 
lip  and  that  breath  is  forced  out.  As  f  uses  lip  and 
teeth,  its  "home"  is  next  to  the  lip  sounds.  (See  Plate  1.) 

Page  9,  group  10.  In  the  next  lesson,  the  children 
build  with  f  as  the  initial  sound,  and  with  a  (bat)  as  the 
vowel  sound. 

1.  f 

2.  a 

3.  t 

See  pp.  44-46. 

Page  9,  group  11. — i  (ill)  is  used  as  the  vowel  sound. 
(For  II,  see  p.  55.) 

Page  9,  group  12. — U  (pwll)  is  used  as  the  vowel  sound. 

The  presence  of  I  I  at  the  end  of  full  leads  to  com- 
parison with  groups  2,  4,  7,  9,  11  of  page  9. 

Ph 

Page  9,  group  13. — Before  taking  the  word  Philip,  the 
digraph  p  h  is  taught. 

(I  was  seriously  considering  the  advisability  of  postpon- 
ing the  teaching  of  this  digraph  to  a  later  date,  when  a  little 
Phyllis  in  my  class,  aged  seven  years,  convinced  me  of  the 
necessity  of  not  deferring  it.  She  remarked,  "  When  I  was 


62  On  the  Teaching 

very  little,  I  used  to  think  that  they  made  a  mistake  when 
they  spelt  my  name  with  p  h,  I  thought  it  ought  to  be  f." 
I  at  once  felt  my  doubt  dispelled  and  recognised  the  neces- 
sity of  giving  the  digraph,  lest  other  Phyllises  and  Philips, 
of  like  mature  years,  should,  in  their  "  early  days,"  question 
the  wisdom  of  their  elders.) 

A  story  is  told  about  Philip  and  his  love  for  his  horse 
(see  Embroidery  card  and  pp.  37-40). 

The  children  notice  that  the  initial  sound  is  like  the  one 
taken  in  the  previous  lesson  (f,  fish). 

They  are  told  that  in  some  words,  which  have  travellec 
a  long,  long  way  to  get  to  us,  we  have  a  different  sign  (or 
symbol)  for  this  sound. 

An  imaginary  journey  is  taken  to  this  far  away  land  to 
bring  home  the  new  friend. 

At  a  later  date,  when  the  knowledge  of  Geography  is 
sufficiently  advanced,  the  journey  to   and   from  Greece  i 
traced  on  the  *  b.b.  map  of  Europe. 

As  our  "  pet  word  "  requires  the  capital,  the  children 
like  to  examine  that  side  of  the  digraph  (see  Note,  p.  63) 
They  also  print  P  h  in  their  Sound  books. 

The  new  symbol  has  a  home  below  f.     (See  Plate  1.) 

In  a  later  lesson  the  children  build  the  word  Philip 
in  the  Frame.  (See  pp.  44-46.) 

Should  there  be  a  Philip  in  the  class,  it  would  interest 
the  children  greatly  to  hear  that  his  name  had  come  this  j 
long,  long  journey,  and  all  eyes  would  be  turned  upon  this  j 
happy  Philip  to  see  how  he  was  bearing  his  honours. 

*  This  map  is  made  of  black-board  cloth  and  has  a  faint  outline 
traced  on  it.     The  children  go  over  this  with  coloured  chalk. 


of  English  Reading  63 

(In  the  Headers  they  will  meet  with  Phyllis,  but  Philip 
was  given  here  as  an  easier  example.  The  former  will  give 
a  further  opportunity  for  the  use  of  this  digraph.) 

Note. — As,  in  the  building  of  P  h  i  I  i  p,  a  capital  must 
be  used,  the  digraph  is  turned  round  and  the  children  see 
P  h  on  the  other  side  (our  hanging  letters  have  the  small 
form  on  one  side,  the  capital  on  the  other).  See  p.  30. 
They  are  asked  to  explain  why  the  capital  is  used.  This 
point  can  be  illustrated  by  reference  to  their  own  names. 

On  revising  this  symbol,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  90. 

V 

The  voiced  counterpart  of  f  is  now  taught.  It  is  intro- 
duced in  a  story  about  a  valley  (see  card). 

See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  67. 

The  lesson  proceeds  as  on  pp.  37-40. 

The  usual  experiments  (see  p.  1 8)  will  lead  the  children 
to  decide  that  V  is  a  brother  and  must  therefore  be  dressed 
in  black  (or  in  white  on  the  b.b.). 

If  the  sound  of  V  be  prolonged  when  the  hands  are 
pressed  close  to  the  ears,  the  vibration  is  especially  strong. 

f 

The  children  much  enjoy  sounding  the  two  sisters,       • 

and  the  brother,  V 

in  this  manner,  prolonging  the  sound  in  the  case  of  each, 
and  noticing  the  contrast. 

They  find  that  V  is  produced  with  the  top  teeth  resting 
lightly  on  the  lower  lip  (cf.  f,  p.  61). 

Its  home  in  the  Frame  will  therefore  be  under  its  two 
sisters.  (See  Plate  1.) 


64  On  the  Teaching 

In  the  next  lesson  the   word   V  a  n   is   built.     (See 
"Steps,"  page  9,  group  14.) 

For  revision,  see  suggestions  on  p.  51. 
See  p.  59,  lines  1-3. 

Steps.    Page  11. 
U  (muff). 

The  new  sound  to  be  taught  is  that  of  u  in  muff. 

A  story  is  told  about  the  two  little  children  who  each 
had  a  muff  (see  Embroidery  card). 

The  word  muff  is  repeated  by  all  in  chorus,  and  the 
children  are  asked  to  discover  the  middle  sound. 

The  lesson  continues  as  on  pp.  37-40. 

They  find  that  U  (muff)  is  a  brother  sound. 

As  the  front  door  is  open  and  nothing  hinders  U  in  its 
passage  out,  the  red  garb  will  be  thought  suitable  apparel 
and  it  will  join  the  vowel  party.  (See  p.  19.) 

The  children  recognise  the  symbol  as  an  old  friend,  for 
they  have  had  U  (pull). 

They  next  discover  the  difference  between  U  (pwll)  and 
U  (muff).  They  notice  that  the  tongue  is  "up  the  back 
stairs  "  for  u  in  pull,  and  that  it  goes  "  downstairs  "  for  u 
in  mwff. 

If  they  repeat  u  (as  in  pwll) 
U  (as  in  muff) 

several  times  in  succession,  with  a  finger  in  the  mouth,  they 
will  feel  the  change  of  tongue  position. 

They  will  now  be  able  to  decide  upon  the  home  of  u 
(muff).     (See  Plate  2.)     See  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  124  (a). 
On  the  discontinuance  of  the  diacritic,  see  p.  22,  and 


of  English  Reading  65 

"Further  Notes,"  p.  58. 

Note. — The  ear  training  which  the  children  are  receiving 
will  help  them  to  the  correct  pronunciation  of  the  printed 
words,  when  they  meet  them  in  the  text  (see  p.  79). 

Cf.  Note  on  very  in  "Further  Notes,"  p.  184. 

For  Suggested  Talks  in  connection  with  p.  11  of  the 
'Steps,"  see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  67. 

Page  11,  group  1. — p  is  used  finally.    Building,  see  p.  44. 
„       group  2.— b 

„       group  3. — t  „  „ 

„       group  4. — d  „  „ 

„       group  5.* — C  k      „  „ 

„       group  6. — g  „  „ 

„       group  7. — m  „  ,, 

„       group  8. — n  „  „ 

group  9. — n  g        „  „ 

The  above  give  opportunities  for  the  use,  as  finals,  of 
the  Stopped  sounds  and  Nasals. 

Group  10. — The  two  I  I  are  used  finally  (see  p.  55). 
Group  11. — This  introduces  the  children  to  a  like  habit 
in  f  when  used  finally  in  words  taking  one  step.  (See  p.  25.) 
The  two  f  f  are  taken  down  by  one  child  as  the  sound  is 
heard  once  only.  The  second  f  is  drawn  in  the  air,  when 
these  words  are  sounded.  For  revision,  see  p.  51. 

The  children  may  be  ready  to  print  some  of  the  words 
of  p.  11  from  dictation,  without  having  built  them  in  the 
Frame.  See  suggestions  for  Stage  4  in  "  Further  Notes," 
p.  155  ;  see  also  General  Remarks,  p.  101  ibid.  - 

*  See  Note,  p.  48. 
E 


66  On  the  Teaching 

Steps.     Page  13. 
t  h  (blue) 

The  new  symbol  is  t  h  as  in  £Arush. 

For  Suggested  Talks  in  connection  with  page  13  of  the 
"Steps"  see  Further  Notes,  p.  68. 

A  story  is  told  about  Dan  and  Tom,  who  fed  the  pet 
£&rush  with  hemp  (see  card  and  pp.  37-40). 

Having  gained  the  sound  t  h,the  children  discover  that 
it  is  a  sister  and  must  be  dressed  in  blue. 

They  find  that  the  tongue  comes  below  the  upper  teeth, 
and  that  breath  is  forced  out. 

As  both  tongue  and  teeth  are  used,  the  home  of  this 
new  digraph  will  be  to  the  right  of  f.  (See  Plate  1.) 

Page  13,  group  1. — In  the  next  lesson  it  is  used  initially 
for  building. 

1.  th  ) 

2.  i  >  See  Note,  p.  48. 

3.  ck         ) 

For  building,  see  pp.  44-46  and  Note  on  p.  80. 

Before  proceeding  to  t  h  (them),  it  is  advisable  to  teach 
the  symbol  e  as  in  egg.  (See  Note  on  p.  68.)  See  pp. 
67,  68. 

t  h  (black) 

t  h  (them),  the  voiced  counterpart  of  t  h  (fArush)  is 
required  for  the  words  of  group  2. 

The  story  is  associated  with  the  pigeons  and  the  maid 
who  fed  them  (see  card  and  pp.  37-40). 


of  English  Reading  67 

The  children  discover  that  the  tongue  acts  as  for  blue 
t  h,  but  they  find  that  t  h  (them)  is  a  brother.  The  dress 
will  be  black  on  a  white  surface  or  white  on  the  b.b. 

The  digraph  t  h  (black)  is  shown,  and  the  children  see 
that  it  is  similar  in  form  to  blue  t  h. 

They  decide  that  its  home  in  the  Frame  must  be  under 
its  sister.  (See  Plate  1.) 

The  difference  of  sound  between  the  sister  and  brother 
will  be  accentuated  if  the  children  press  their  hands  to  their 
ears  and  utter  t  h  (as  in  ^rush) 

t  h  (as  in  them) 
in  chorus,  several  times  in  succession. 

Page  13,  group  2. — For  the  building  of  the  words 
that  and  than,  see  p.  44. 

e 

The  sound  of  6  as  in  egg  requires  especial  care,  as  the 
children  are  inclined  to  confuse  it  with  j  (ill),  It  is  partly 
on  this  account  that  a  long  interval  elapses  between  the 
teaching  of  e  and  i. 

A  story  is  told  about  Philip,  who  had  an  egg  in  his 
hand  (see  Embroidery  card). 

See  pp.  37-40.     See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  68. 

Having  gained  the  sound  e,  the  children  discover  that 
it  is  one  of  the  important  sounds,  for  it  is  a  brother,  and 
comes  out  unhindered  (see  p.  19). 

It  must  therefore  be  clothed  in  red. 

They  now  have  to  consider  its  home. 

By  putting  a  finger  in  the  mouth,  they  find  that  the 
tongue  rises  a  little  towards  the  lips. 


68  On  the  Teaching 

I'D  realise  this  more  fully,  they  repeat  a  (as  in  bat) 

6  (as  in  egg) 
several  times  in  succession  (cf.  p.  64). 

They  decide  that  the  home  of  e  must  be  a  little  way 
up  "  the  front  stairs."  (See  Plate  2.) 

Note. — As  e  appears  in  them,  teachers  may  prefer 
to  give  the  lesson  on  e  before  taking  black  t  h. 

See  Note  on  p.  124  of  "Further  Notes." 

Page  13,  group  3. — "Words  containing  e  («gg)  and  final 
t  are  built. 

It  will  be  noticed  how  charmingly  the  pictures  on  the 
left-hand  side  of  p.  12  lend  themselves  to  the  illustration  of 
this  group. 

See  suggestions  on  p.  76  of  "Further  Notes." 

Groups  4-6.  —  Instead  of  building  these  words,  the 
children  may  be  able  to  print  them  from  dictation.  See 
"Further  Notes,"  p.  155,  Stage  4  (&). 

Page  13,  group  7. — The  word  them  gives  an  oppor- 
tunity for  the  use  of  black  t  h. 

Page  13,  group  8. — W  hen  calls  into  use  the  digraph 
W  h  (see  pp.  57,  58) ;  and  then  requires  black  t  h. 

Page  13,  group  9. — On  II,  see  p.  55  ;  see  also  Note, 
p.  80. 

On  suggestions  for  revision,  see  p.  51. 

Steps.     Page  15. 

S  (blue) 

The  new  sound  to  be  taught  is  S  (sun). 
A  story  is  told  about  Dan,  who  rode  home  as  the  $un 
was  setting  (see  card  and  pp.  37-40). 


of  English  Reading  69 

S  (sun)  is  found  to  be  a  sister  sound :  it  will  therefore 
be  blue. 

A  home  for  it  is  chosen  in  the  column  allotted  to 
"  ridge  "  sounds.  (See  Plate  1.) 

The  children  are  asked  to  think  of  any  sounds  which  S 
suggests  to  them  (hissing,  letting  off  steam). 

Page  15,  group  1. — This  introduces  words  containing 
blue  S  as  the  initial  sound. 

C  (mince). 

A  story  is  told  about  the  dog  who  stole  the  mince  (see 
Embroidery  card). 

The  children  discover  the  sounds  in  "  mince." 

They  sound   m      i      n      S  (as  in  sun). 

They  are  then  asked  to  build  the  word  as  far  as  m  i  n. 

We  must  now  reveal  the  secret  that  another  friend  is 
coming  into  the  word  to  represent  the  next  sound.  (They 
would  naturally  wish  to  use  S  for  sun.) 

They  are  asked  to  "go  to  sleep,"  and,  during  their 
slumbers,  C  (from  the  box  of  Symbols)  and  e  are  added  to 
the  signs  in  the  building  part. 

When  they  wake  up,  they  may  protest,  "  That  is  the 

cat    c!" 

They  are  told  that  when  she  meets  certain  red  friends, 
she  speaks  in  this  way. 

They  notice  the  red  friend  e,  whose  work  here  is  to  tell 
us  that  c  will  have  the  sound  of  S. 

Note. — e  will  not  take  a  step  forward :  it  is  drawn  in 
the  air  when  the  word  m  i  n  C  6  is  sounded. 


70  On  the  Teaching 

(The  children  are  much  amused  at  this  variation  on  the 
part  of  C.  Cf.  p.  20,  lines  20-23.) 

The  home  of  m  i  n  C  6  C  is  under  blue  S.  (See 
Plate  1.) 

See  pp.  39,  40.  For  group  2,  see  p.  44.  See  also 
"Further  Notes,"  p.  90. 

S  (black) 

The  next  symbol  taught  is  black  3  (crabs).  (See 
"Further  Notes,"  p.  68.) 

A  story  is  told  about  the  boys  who  were  looking  for 
crabs  (see  card).  This  word  is  repeated  and  the  final  sound 
gained.  (See  pp.  37-40.) 

The  children  discover  that  S  (crabs)  is  a  brother  and 
must  be  clothed  in  black. 

They  find  that  the  tongue  behaves  as  for  S  in  sun. 
The  home  of  black  S  will  therefore  be  under  its  sisters. 
(See  Plate  1.) 

Black  S  is  compared  with  blue  S ;  brother  S  (crabs)  is 
seen  to  have  the  same  form  as  sister  S  (sun).  (Cf.  black 
t  h  and  blue  t  h,  in  "  Steps  to  Reading,"  p.  13.) 

In  later  lessons,  brother  S  is  used  for  building  words. 

Note. — In  addition  to  the  words  has,  crabs,  it  is  advisable 
to  build  a  few  more.  The  extra  words  can  be  associated 
with  the  pictures  in  the  Steps  : — 

e.g.  bags,  see  picture,  p.     2  ;  pigs,     see  picture,  p.    4  ; 
lads,  „          p.     6 ;  wings,  „          p.     8 ; 

buds,          „  p.  10;  pegs,  „          p.  12. 

z 
A  story  is  told  about  the  bees,  which  began  to  buzz 


of  English  Reading  71 

round  the  window  (see  card  and  pp.  37-40). 

The  sound  Z  is  found  to  be  similar  to  S  (crabs).  It 
will  therefore  be  black,  and  its  home  will  be  under  its 
brother,  s  (see  Plate  1). 

Plate  15,  group  4.  The  word  buzz  is  built  in  the 
following  manner : — 

1.          b  ( 2.    The    vowel    taken    is    the 

2  u  <  m  uff  '  u(seeNote,p.22). 

J  3.  The  two  symbols  are  taken 

3.  Z  Z        \     by  one  child. 

The  second  Z  is  drawn  in  the  air  when  the  children 
sound  or  step  this  word. 

They  also  build  zigzag  (see  picture  of  path, 
"  Steps,"  p.  8,  and  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  90). 

O 

The  new  sound  is  introduced  in  a  story  about  the  boys 
who  had  a  top  (see  card  and  pp.  37-40). 

The  word  top  is  repeated  in  chorus  and  the  children 
discover  the  middle  sound  in  it. 

Having  gained  O,  they  find  that  it  is  a  "  boy "  or 
"brother"  sound  (see  Note,  p.  36). 

They  close  their  eyes,  sound  O  in  chorus,  and  try  to 
feel  what  the  tongue  does. 

They  will  find,  by  putting  a  finger  in  the  mouth  and 
sounding  u   (as  in  pwll) 
O  (as  in  top) 

several  times  in  succession,  that  O  is  a  little  way  down  the 
"  back  stairs." 

They   are   asked   what   colour  its  dress  will  be.     Its 


72  On  the  Teaching 

unobstructed  passage,  together  with  the  vibration   of  the 
vocal  chords,  will  lead  them  to  decide  upon  red. 

A.S  the  tongue  is  lower  for  o  (top)  than  for  u  (pwll), 
the  home  of  O  is  lower  than  that  of  U.  (See  p.  71  and 
Plate  2.)  See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  124  (a). 

Now  that  we  have  another  of  these  important  red  friends, 
a  great  many  new  words  can  be  gained.     (See  p.  44.) 
Page  15,  group  5. —     is  taken  as  the  final  consonant. 
„        group  6. — b  „ 

„        group  7. — t  „ 

„        group  8. — d  „ 

„        group  9.* — C  k  „ 

„        group  10. — g  ,, 

Note. — The  children  may  like  to  print  the  words  of 
groups  7,  8  and  10  from  dictation.  Of.  remarks  on  groups 
4-6,  p.  68. 

sh 

The  new  symbol  is  S  h  (ship}.  A  story  is  told  about 
Jack,  who  was  rigging  his  ship  (see  card  and  pp.  37-40). 

The  children  discover  that  S  h  is  a  sister  sound :  it 
will  therefore  be  dressed  in  blue. 

They  find  that  it  is  produced  a  little  farther  back  than 
S,  as  in  sun.  (Of.  the  sounds  S,  S  h.) 

They  decide  that  the  home  of  the  digraph  S  h  must 
be  to  the  right  of  S.  (See  Plate  1.) 

They  are  asked  whether  they  have  ever  heard  anyone 

*  See  Note  on  p.  48. 


of  English  Reading  73 

say  S  h  quite  by  itself.     It  is  probably  a  familiar  sound  if 
they  have  a  baby  brother  or  sister. 

The  children  much  enjoy  dramatic  action  for  the  illus- 
tration of  this  sound.  Some  of  them  go  to  sleep,  whilst  one 
of  the  party  trips  round  the  room  on  tip-toe.  Another 
holds  up  a  finger  and  says  S  h  ! 

When  this  sound  was  under  discussion,  they  remarked  "No 
wonder  poor  S  h  says  S  h  !  when  the  others  (meaning  S,  C,  S,  2)  are 
hissing  and  buzzing  all  the  time."  (See  Plate  1.) 

As  S  h  is  produced  so  near  S,  I  did  not  put  a  dividing 
line  in  the  Frame. 

In  the  next  building  lesson  S  h  is  taken  as  the  final 
sound,  the  symbols  being  taken  down  in  the  following 
order : — 

1.  d 

2.  '  a 

3.  sh 

See  pp.  44-46. 

C  h  (finch,  chaise). 

The  children  are  told  a  story  about  a  jmck  that  had 
built  its  nest  in  an  apple-tree  (see  card  and  "Further 
Notes,"  p.  68). 

They  discover  the  sounds  in  the  word  "  finch." 

f    i     n     ch(  =  sh) 

The  lesson  proceeds  as  on  pp.  37-40. 

They  may  expect  the  final  sound  to  be  represented  by 
the  symbol  S  h  (ship).  But  when  they  are  shown  the 
digraph  C  h  (see  p.  38,  section  7),  they  see  that  we  have 
another  sign  for  this  sound. 


74  On  the  Teaching 

They  choose  a  home  for  c  h  (finc^)  under  that  of  its 
sister,  S  h  (ship). 

(See  Plate  1.) 

They  must  now  go  on  a  voyage  of  discovery  to  find  the 
nose  sound  which  this  digraph  c  h  likes  to  follow. 

We  refer  to  our  story  (see  p.  73)  and  draw  their  attention 
to  the  third  sound  in  our  "  pet  word  "  finch. 

They  all  repeat  the  word  finch  in  chorus  and  they 
discover  that  n  is  the  nose  sound  that  C  h  is  so  fond  of. 

They  will  enjoy  building  this  word  by  "  express  train." 
(See  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  100.) 

Note. — When  revising  the  symbols  in  the  Frame  (see 
"Further  Notes,"  p.  90)  the  children  like  to  point  to  n 
and  c  h,  after  they  have  given  the  sound  and  pet  word. 

Page  15,  group  12. — In  the  next  lesson,  the  words  of 
this  group  are  built.  (See  Note,  p.  80.) 

1.  i 

2.  n 

3.  ch 

Page  15,  group  13. — A  second  opportunity  is  given 
for  building  with  c  h  preceded  by  its  favourite  n.  These 
words  will  introduce  the  muff  U  (see  Note,  p.  22).  . 

The  building  proceeds  as  on  p.  44,  the  symbols  being 
taken  in  the  following  order  : — 

1.  b  ) 

2.  u  f     2.  For  muff    U, 

3.  n  (          see  Plate  2. 

4.  ch         j 

See  Note,  p.  80. 


of  English  Reading  75 

S  (treasure) 

S  (treasure).  This  voiced  counterpart  of  S  h  is  not 
found  in  words  sufficiently  simple  for  the  children  to  build 
at  this  stage.  I  tell  them  that  the  "  brother  "  to  S  h  is 
found  in  the  word  treasure,  and  they  must  guard  him  as 
such  until  they  need  him. 

A  story  is  told  introducing  the  word  treasure,  and  the 
lesson  proceeds  as  on  pp.  37-40. 

Being  a  brother,  S  is  clad  in  black. 

Its  home  is  under  its  sisters,  S  h 

ch. 

See  Plate  1,  and  Note  on  p.  22. 

On  revision,  see  p.  51. 

Steps.     Page  16. 

h  heads  the  last  page  as  it  is  the  last  of  the  simple 
sounds  in  the  Table  of  Consonants.  For  building,  see  p. 
44. 

A  lesson  was  given  on  h  previous  to  the  digraphs  in 
which  it  appears  (w  h,  p  h,  t  h,  S  h,  C  h  ),  see  p.  56,  but, 
in  building  complete  studies,  it  will  come  into  use  last  of 
the  simple  consonantal  sounds.  (See  First  Primer,  Study  3.) 

All  the  simple  consonantal  sounds  have  now  been 
learnt  and  the  six  short  vowel  sounds  (bat,  ill,  pull,  muff, 
«gg,  top). 

The  consonantal  double  sounds  will  be  taught  in  the 
later  books  as  the  children  require  them. 

These  books  give  further  opportunity  for  the  revision 
of  the  simple  sounds,  and  this  will  enable  the  children  to 
discover  the  component  parts  of  the  double  sounds. 


76  On  the  Teaching 

Page  16,  No.  4. — The  children  are  told  a  story  about 
Pat  who  had  a  rat. 

1.  They  are  asked  to  repeat  "  Pat  had  a  rat "  and  to 
give  the  sound  which  comes  before  rat.      Having  gained 
the  pronunciation  that  is  used  in  fluent  speech,  they  are 
told  that  this  is  an  old  friend  of  theirs,  but  he  is  in  a  very 
weak  condition.     He  will  always  have  this  weakened  sound 
when  he  is  quite  alone.      (See  p.  29   for  Note  on  weak 
forms.) 

2.  The  word  r  a  t  is  built  in  the  Frame.    The  children 
then  "  go  to  sleep,"  and  a,  from  the  box  of  Symbols  ("  the 
hospital "),  is  given  to  Jack,  who  places  it  a  little  distance 
to  the  left. 

When  they  awake,  they  print  a     r  a  t  on  their  b.b. 

3.  All   are   asked   to   repeat   a     rat,   and   different 
children  give  sentences  about  a  rat.     This  will  lead  them 
instinctively  to  the  pronunciation  of  a  in  fluent  speech. 

It  is  most  important  that  they  should  not  give  it  the 
broad  sound  of  a  as  in  baby. 

a  S  a  C  k  is  introduced  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
above.  (See  sections  1,  2,  3.) 

Further  examples  can  be  supplied  from  previous  pages 
of  the  "  Steps." 

4.  The  words  of  the  sentence,  "Pat  had  a  fat  rat,"  are 
printed  with  coloured  chalks  on  the  b.b.    The  children  then 
open  their  "  Steps,  "  and  find  them. 

The  word  Pat  will  necessitate  the  use  of  a  capital 
letter  (cf.  Philip,  and  see  Note,  p.  63). 

5.  This  sentence  is  printed  and  illustrated  by  the  children 
in  their  Word  books. 

In  connection  with  p.  16,  see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  68. 


of  English  Reading  77 

Note. — It  is  important  that  a  separate  lesson  should  be 
given  on  Nos.  4,  5,  6,  7  (see  "Steps,"  p.  16). 

Page  16,  No.  5. — The  children  are  told  they  are  going 
on  a  voyage  of  discovery  in  search  of  another  little  red 
friend,  the  sound  of  which  has  grown  weak.  (See  p.  29.) 

The  sentence  "  The  rat  hid  in  a  sack  "  is  given.  They 
are  asked  to  repeat  it  in  chorus  and  then  to  give  the  first 
word.  (Care  must  be  taken  that  they  give  the  the  pro- 
nunciation that  it  has  before  a  consonant  in  fluent  speech.) 

They  discover  the  sounds,  and  place  t  h  (them)  in  the 
building  part.  They  go  to  sleep  (cf.  p.  76,  section  2)  and 
6  is  then  placed  to  the  right  of  t  h.  On  awaking,  they 
find  that  e  represents  the  weakened  sound.  They  all  print 
t  h  6  on  their  b.b. 

(I  think  it  is  best  to  let  them  take  the  henceforth 
as  a  whole,  not  sounding  it.) 

At  present  nothing  is  said  of  the  pronunciation  that  is 
given  to  the  before  a  vowel.  This  will  be  gained  from  the 
children  later.  (See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  192.) 

For  the  sentence  "The  rat  hid  in  a  sack,"  see  p.  76, 
sections  4,  5. 

For  the  capital,  t  h  (black)  is  turned  round. 

Page  16,  No.  6. — The  word  to  is  introduced  in  a  story  in 
which  the  following  sentence  occurs  : — "  Pat  ran  to  the  sack." 
All  repeat  this  sentence,  and  are  asked  what  word  comes 
before  "the  sack."  Having  gained  to,  they  discover  the 
sounds,  and  the  lesson  proceeds  as  for  t  h  e. 

t  O  is  henceforth  taken  as  a  whole  (cf.  t  h  e).     For  the 


78     On  the  Teaching  of  English  Reading 

sentence  (No.  6),  see  p.  76,  sections  4,  5. 

Page  16,  No.  7. — They  have  had  three  red  friends  be- 
having in  a  playful  manner;  now  they  are  going  to  be 
introduced  to  a  consonant,  generally  a  sister,  which,  in  a 
very  useful  little  word,  speaks  like  a  brother. 

A  story  introduces,  "  Pat  had  a  cup  of  milk." 

The  children  are  asked  for  the  word  preceding  "milk." 

They  repeat  the  sentence,  give  the  word  O  f,  and 
discover  the  sounds  in  this  word. 

Janie  sounds  O      V. 

The  usual  experiments  lead  to  the  decision  that  the 
second  sound  will  be  dressed  in  black. 

A  child  places  O  in  the  building  part,  and  black  f 
appears  during  the  slumbers  of  the  class  (cf.  p.  77). 

They  all  print  O  f  on  their  b.b. 

For  the  sentence,  see  p.  76,  sections  4,  5. 

In  the  next  lesson  the  children  may  like  to  read  the 
two  last  sentences  of  No.  7  for  themselves. 


ON  THE  FIRST  PRIMER. 

ALL  the  simple  consonantal  sounds  have  now  been  learnt, 
and  the  children  can  build  up  more  complete  "studies" 
(or  groups  of  words)  than  those  which  appeared  in  the 
"  Steps  to  Reading." 

As  they  will  have  had  so  much  practice  in  building  and 
printing  they  can  take  an  even  more  active  part  than  before, 
and  I  find  that  I  can  give  the  conduct  of  affairs  almost 
entirely  into  their  hands. 

Colour  is  used  throughout  the  First  and  Second  Primer 
and  the  Infant  Reader  for  the  groups  of  words  that  head 
the  text. 

The  text  is  in  uniform  black.  (See  Note,  p.  28.)  The 
introduction  to  the  Hack  text  marks  an  important  stage  in 
the  work  of  the  children,  for  it  gives  them  opportunities  for 
proceeding  from  sign  to  speech.  {Of.  "  Further  Notes,"  pp. 
85-87.) 

They  now  discover  how  to  turn  their  printing  into 
writing.  (See  "  Further  Notes,"  Chapter  XXIII.) 

For  the  Supplementary  Chapters  bearing  on  the  First 
Primer,  see  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  58,  59. 

Study  1. 

The  children  are  told  that  they  are  going  to  build  a  great 
many  words  in  which  their  red  friend  a  (bat)  will  appear. 
Amongst  these  words  they  will  find  some  old  friends,  and 
these  will  be  joined  by  several  new  ones. 

79 


8o  On  the  Teaching 

Suggestions  for  the  Groups  of  Words. 

Full  notes  on  various  ways  of  handling  the  groups  of 
words  will  be  found  in  Chapter  XVI.  of  "  Further  Notes." 

On  Stories  introducing  the  words  of  a  group,  see 
"Further  Notes,"  pp.  78-81. 

On  Nature  Talks  in  connection  with  the  Eeaders,  see 
suggestions  at  the   end   of  each   Study  (e.g.  p.  82).     See 
also   "Further   Notes,"  pp.   61-64,  the  Note    on  p.    65  ;  j 
pp.  69,  70. 

Children,  who  have  worked  steadily  through  the  "  Steps," 
may  like  to  point  out  some  of  the  words  which  are  old 
friends  (see  "Further  Notes,"  Third  Plan,  p.  102). 

But  it  is  advisable  to  let  them  build  : — 

(1)  words  containing  new  signs  (e.g.  chat,  Study  3) ; 

(2)  the  words  in  large  type  (e.g.  pp.  81,  87); 

(3)  and  words  in  which   there  are  interesting  secrets 
(e.g.  ink,  i#reck,  ditch). 

Note. — The  words  of  a  group  containing  a  special  point 
(e.g.  n  +  C  h,  d  g  +  6,  see  Studies  43,  45)  are  each  built 
separately.  The  signs  of  the  first  word  are  therefore  all 
taken  home  before  the  second  word  is  built.  This  is  very 
helpful  in  impressing  the  particular  "  secret "  that  such 
words  contain. 

The  children  like  to  build  these  words  by  "express  train." 
They  run  out  in  turn  to  get  the  symbols  required,  and,  when 
the  word  has  been  sounded,  stepped,  printed  and  illustrated, 
others  run  out  to  take  the  symbols  home. 

On  Recorders,  see  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  108,  109, 
sections  3,  4. 


of  English  Reading  81 

When  the  first  eight  words  of  Study  1  have  been  taken, 
the  story  introduces  : — S  nap 
slap 
trap 
strap. 

Each  of  these  words  is  built  as  it  is  introduced. 

Extra  sentences  might  be  given  in  the  case  of  r  a  p  to 
ensure  the  children's  attaching  the  right  meaning  to  it. 

(If  they  use  the  above  in  the  sense  of  wrap,  they  are 
told  that  ivrap  has  a  secret  in  it,  which  they  will  learn 
later  on.  See  p.  11.) 

The  word  sap  will  be  interesting  to  them  if  they 
have  had  Nature  Lessons  on  plants. 

On  avoiding  any  incorrect  presentation  of  words,  see 
Note,  p.  25. 

On  the  handling  of  the  text,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  110. 

On  the  family  appearing  in  it,  „  p.  130. 

On  the  stops,  „  p.  117. 

On  suggested  words  for  stepping,  „  p.  126. 

On  dramatic  action,  „  p.  133. 

On  Writing  in  connection  with 
the  First  Primer,  „    pp.  135-144. 

On  Dictation,  „    pp.  157-158. 

Capitals :  P       ef.  p    (See  Plate  3.) 

S       „  s 
*W  h  „  w  h 
D       „  d 
T       „  t 

The  first  and  last  of  the  above  capitals  will  be  familiar 
*See  Note  on  p.  30. 


82  On  the  Teaching 

(see  Steps,  p.  16).     S  and  W  h  will  present  no  difficulty. 

On  the  full  stop  and  comma,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  1 1 8. 

Pat  and  Tom  appeared  in  the  Steps  (p.  16).  Pat  is 
9  years  old  and  is  the  fourth  in  our  family.  (See  p.  32.) 
Tom  is  a  friend.  Dan  is  the  eldest  brother  of  the  family, 
aged  12  years,  with  strong  naturalist  tastes.  Snap  is  Pat's 
fox-terrier.  Mr  Walter  Crane  has  kindly  given  a  picture  of 
his  own  fox-terrier,  at  the  request  of  the  children. 

Suggestions. — A  Nature  Lesson  on  a  fox-terrier  in 
connection  with  Snap  (see  p.  62  of  "  Further  Notes). 
Sand-modelling  of  a  hill. 

Study  2. 

The  final  consonant  is  b,  brother  to  p.     (See  p.  80.) 
When  the  first  two  words  have  been  gained,  the  children 

build  the  word  crab,  taking  the  symbols  in  the  following 

order : — 

1.  C 

2.  r 

3.  a 

4.  b 

On  the  apostrophe,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  118. 

On  Stepping,  „  p.  126. 

On  Words  for  Writing  in 
connection  with  Studies  2-18,  „  p.  143. 

Dan,  the  eldest  brother  of  the  family,  is  already  showing 
his  taste  for  Natural  History. 

Capital :  *T  h  (black)  cf.  t  h  (black).     (See  Plate  3.) 

*  See  Note  on  p.  30. 


of  English  Reading  83 

Suggestions. — It  would  greatly  interest  the  children 
if  the  above  Study  could  be  preceded  by  a  Nature  Lesson 
on  a  crab. 

Drawings  of  the  crab  in  Pat's  cap  might  be  made  by 
the  children,  after  the  reading  of  the  text. 

Study  3. 

The  final  consonant  is  t. 

The  lesson  proceeds  as  for  Study  1.     (See  p.  80.) 

Having  gained  the  word  pat,  the  story  introduces 
Pat,  and  one  of  the  children  is  asked  to  reverse  p. 

The  use  of  the  capital  letter  will  recall  the  associations 
of  page  16,  Nos.  4,  6,  V  of  the  "Steps  to  Beading." 

When  the  first  ten  words  have  been  taken,  the  story  is 
continued  to  introduce  flat. 

The  children  are  told  that  there  is  a  very  nice,  cosy 
word  which  might  join  this  party,  but  they  cannot  build  it 
until  a  new  "  friend  "  comes  to  help  them. 

C  h  (c&at). 

The  double  sound  C  h  is  introduced  in.  a  story  about 
Pat,  who  had  a  chat,  with  Nan. 

(See  picture  heading  Study  3.  See  also  Note  on 
Double  Sounds,  p.  4.) 

1.  All  repeat  the  word  "  chat "  in  chorus. 

2.  May  is  asked  to  tell  the  class  what  she  hears  at  the 
beginning  of  this  word. 

3.  She  quickly  discovers  C  h  (chat). 

4.  All  sound  C  h  in  chorus. 

5.  They  hear  that  C  h  is  not  a  simple  sound,  and  they 


84  On  the  Teaching 

try  to  discover  the  two  sounds  of  which  it  is  composed : 
t  (fab)  +  S  h  (sMp). 

If  they  cannot  find  them  now,  they  will  have  another 
opportunity  for  considering  them  (see  Study  13). 

If  they  should  at  once  recognise  the  component  parts, 
there  would  be  no  need  to  postpone  the  analysis,  as  it 
would  show  that  they  were  ready  to  give  it.  But,  failing 
this,  the  joy  of  discovery  will  be  none  the  less  from  its 
having  been  deferred. 

They  are  asked  what  sound  it  suggests  to  them,  and  will 
readily  answer,  "  A  sneeze." 
(My  little  pupils  delight  in  calling  this  c  h  (ch&t)  "  the  sneezing  sister." 

6.  They  are  asked  to  decide  whether  it  will  be  dressec 
in  blue  or  black.     The  usual  experiments  (the  pressing  o 
the  hands  close  to  the  ears,  and  the  placing  of  the  hand  in 
front  of  the  mouth,  whilst  uttering  the  sound),  will  lead  to 
the  choice  of  the  blue  dress. 

V.   The  symbol  c  h  is  shown,  and  is  compared  with 
C  h  (finc&,  chaise)  which  is  hanging  below  S  h.     Its  exac 
likeness  in  form  and  colour  is  noticed.     The  difference  in 
sound  is  proved  by  repeating  C  h  (fincA.,  chaise)  and  C  h 
(efeat). 

See  p.  39,  sections  9-14. 

The  home  of  C  h  (chat)  is  in  the  column  arranged  fo 
the  double  sounds  (see  Plate  1). 

For  the  building  of  the  word  chat,  see  p.  44. 

The  children  read  lines  1-6  of  the  text  of  Study  3,  anc 
in  the  next  lesson,  the  symbol  X  (blue)  is  taught.  (Note 
on  the  teaching  of  this  will  be  found  on  p.  94.) 


of  English  Reading  85 

This  is  followed  by  the  reading  of  lines  7-9  of  the 
text. 

On  the  note  of  interrogation,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p. 
119. 

On  the  word  for  Stepping,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  126. 

Capitals;  N  cf.  n.     (See  Plate  3.) 

I    „    i. 
A  „  a. 

New  friends  appear  in  Nan,  aged  ten,  the  eldest  girl  of 
the  family,  and  her  cat,  which  is  reposing  in  the  hat.  (See 
"  Further  Notes,"  p.  131  ;  see  also  p.  91  ibid.) 

Suggestions.  —  A  lesson  on  Nan's  cat. 

Study  4. 

The  final  consonant  is  d,  brother  to  t. 

For  Suggestions,  see  p.  80.  . 

When  the  first  five  words  have  been  taken,  the  story 
introduces  glad. 

Before  proceeding  to  the  reading  of  the  text,  a  double 
sound  has  to  be  learnt,  so  that  the  children  may  be  able  to 
build  and  read  the  name  of  a  new  friend  who  appears  in 
this  Study. 


The  word  jump  is  introduced  in  a  story  about  Philip 
and  Dan,  who  had  been  practising  a  long  yump. 

(See  picture  heading  Study  57,  and  Note  on  Double 
Sounds,  p.  4.) 

The  lesson  proceeds  as  on  pp.  37-40. 


86  On  the  Teaching 

The  children  may  be  able  to  discover  the  two  sounds 
which  it  contains  :  d  (dog)  +  S  (treasure). 

Should  they  fail  to  do  so,  they  will  have  other  oppor- 
tunities later  on  (see  pp.  107,  134). 

They  find  that  j  is  a  "brother"  and  will  therefore  be 
clothed  in  black. 

Suggestions  are  invited  as  to  its  home,  as  some  may 
already  recognise  that  it  is  the  "  brother  "  double  sound  to 
C  h  (cAat).  It  is  then  hung  in  its  appointed  place.  (See 
Plate  1.) 

When  the  children  read  the  text,  they  meet  the  friend 
whose  name  will  require  capital  J  (see  p.  30). 

This  new  friend  is  Jack,  aged  eight,  regarded  by  the  rest 
of  his  family  as  the  "  sailor  boy." 

On  the  exclamation  stop,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  119. 

On  the  word  for  Stepping,  „  p.  126. 

See  also  pp.  91  and  131  ibid. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  word  suggested  for  writing 
(see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  143)  introduces  p  initially. 

Study  5. 

C  k  is  taken  as  the  final  sound,  the  eye  seeing  the 
two  "  sisters "  of  g,  but  the  ear  hearing  the  sound  once 
only. 

The   symbols   are   taken   down   by  the  children  in  the 
following  order : — 

I-  P 

2.  a 

3,  Ck.     (See  Note,  p.  48.) 


of  English  Reading  87 

For  building  suggestions,  see  p.  80.  When  the  first 
five  words  have  been  taken,  the  story  is  continued  to 
introduce  : — 

Jack 

stack 

track 

crack 

smack 

black 

quack. 

(The  last  word  delights  the  children,  as  it  calls  into  use 
the  three  little  "  sisters  "  of  g.) 

When  the  children  read  the  text,  they  notice  the 
asterisks  :  on  the  use  of  these,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  119. 

Suggested  word  for  stepping,  ,,  p.  126. 

Capital :  Q  u   cf.   q  u. 

Note. — As  q  U  is  now  hanging  in  the  Tabulating  Frame, 
the  children  will  turn  the  digraph  (see  p.  30)  round  to  find 
the  capital. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  duck.  Drawings 
from  the  children  of  the  duck  getting  into  the  sack,  or  of 
Dan  sitting  on  the  hay-stack  with  Snap. 

The  quacking  of  the  duck  suggests  the  comparison  of 
sounds  made  by  different  animals. 

Study  6. 

c 

The  final  consonant  is  g,  "  brother "  to  k 

q 


88 


On  the  Teaching 


The  symbols  are  taken  down  in  the  following  order  :- 

1.  b 

2.  a 

3-  g 

See  p.  80. 

The  first  five  words  having  been  taken,  the  story  is 
continued  to  introduce  : — 

stag 

drag 

crag. 

The  word  flag  will  probably  be  suggested. 
Capital :  W  cf.  w. 

Suggested  word  for  stepping,  see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  126. 
The  word  for  writing,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  143, 
introduces  b  initially. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  stag.  A  talk  about 
rocks  and  crags.  The  painting  of  the  Union  Jack. 

Study  7. 

The  six  preceding  studies  have  brought  into  use  the  six 
"  stopped  "  sounds  as  finals  in  the  words  built. 

The  children  now  use  the  nasals  as  final  sounds ;  the 
first  to  be  used  is  m. 

Symbols : 

1.  P 

2.  a 

3.  m 

See  p.  80. 

The  first  four  words  having  been  built,  the  Word  jam 
gives  an  opportunity  for  the  use  of  J  (/ump). 


of  English  Reading  89 

The  children  will  remember  having  used  the  capital  in 
Jack.  (See  Study  5.) 

The  story  is  continued  and  introduces  the  word  C  P  a  m. 

Word  for  stepping. — (Hearing}  himself. 

Note. — On  Stepping,  see  p.  25.     On  Hearing,  see  p.  34. 

The  children  have  had  some  practice  in  stepping  spoken 
words  of  two  syllables  (see  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  126).  They 
are  now  going  to  have  words  which  take  two  steps  introduced 
in  the  text.  I  have  found  the  following  plan  very  helpful 
in  the  gaining  of  these  words : — 

1.  The  reader  meets  the  word  "  himself,"  for  example, 
in  the  text  and  sounds  it. 

(I.      himself 

2.  The  children  \ 

build     it     by     the^  2.       himself 

"PYTYTPCIQ   train"  Wlnn    I  Blue    red    whlte    Wue     red   white  blue 

express  train    pian  \^  onb.b.  onb.b. 

(see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  100),  and  they  much  enjoy 
coming  out  in  turn  to  print  the  letters  in  colour.  (See 
Plates  1  and  12.) 

3.  The  word  being  now  in  the  Frame,  one  of  the  children 
is  chosen  to  step  it,  the  others  watching  to  see  if  a  step  is 
taken  when  the  vowel  is  uttered,  and  listening  to  hear 
if  correct  sounds  are  given. 

It  is  the  great  aim  of  the  "  stepper  "  to  give  the  word  at 
the  end  of  the  first  journey. 

4.  Should  this  end  not  be  attained  the  word  is  sounded 
by  all  in  chorus,  and  another  is  asked  to  come  out  and 
"  step."      (They  prefer  "  stepping  "  any  number  of  times  to 
being  told.) 

5.  If  space  permits,  the  whole  class  might  stand  and 


90  On  the  Teaching 

step  the  word  whilst  sounding  in  chorus ;  or  different  lines 
might  stand  for  this  purpose. 

(See  Suggestions  for  Many  Steppers,  "  Further  Notes," 
pp.  125,  126.) 

The  children  take  the  greatest  pleasure  in  this  practice, 
and  delight  in  having  words  given  them  to  "  step  "  at  home. 
They  print  these  words  in  class,  in  colour,  on  paper  ruled 
with  wide  double  lines.  The  paper  is  held  in  the  hand  as 
they  step  the  words  printed  on  it.  I  am  sometimes  told  "  I 
stepped  each  word  eight  times"  (or  perhaps  a  greater 
number  of  times).  The  increased  precision  certainly  testi- 
fied to  many  journeys  on  the  part  of  each  word. 

In  the  text,  we  meet  Sam,  a  friend  of  Dan's. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  ram.  The  history 
of  a  pot  of  jam  gained  from  the  children. 

The  children  like  to  print  and  illustrate  the  words 
taking  two  or  more  steps,  and  one  or  two  "records"  are 
kept. 

Study  8. 

The  final  consonant  is  the  nasal  n. 

Symbols : 

1.  p 

2.  a 

3.  n 

See  p.  80.  It  is  advisable  to  let  the  children  build  the 
two  words  containing  capital  letters  and  the  words  bran 
and  p  I  a  n. 

On  the  inverted  commas,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  pp.  117, 
119,  120, 


of  English  Reading  91 

Word  for  stepping. — (Hearing  +  Sight}  shilling.  See 
"Further  Notes,"  p.  127  («). 

Note. — On  Hearing  and  Sight,  see  p.  34. 

Capital :  R  cf.  r. 

Suggestions. — History  of  a  pan  in  connection  with 
clay-modelling.  A  talk  about  bran,  which  the  children 
would  be  interested  to  see.  A  lesson  on  a  shilling,  if  the 
arithmetical  knowledge  be  sufficiently  far  advanced. 

Study  9. 

The  nasal  n  g  is  used  as  the  final  sound. 
Symbols : 

1.  b 

2.  a 

3  ng 

See  p.  80.  When  the  first  five  words  have  been  taken, 
the  story  introduces  sprang. 

On  the  use  of  the  hyphen, see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  120. 

The  children  may  be  able  to  suggest  all  the  changes  for 
turning  bang  into  writing.  (See  "Further  Notes," 
p.  143.) 

Word  for  stepping. — *H  +  S.  Cricket.  (Cf.  packing, 
"  Further  Notes,"  p.  126.) 

Tom,  who  now  comes  to  see  our  family,  is  Jack's  special 
friend.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that  he  will  make  kind  enquiries  as 
to  the  health  of  the  pet  rat  which  he  sent  to  Pat  (Study  1). 

Suggestions. — The  word  fang  might  be  illustrated  by 
reference  to  Pat's  fox-terrier,  Snap  (see  Study  1). 

*  H. +  S.  =  Hearing  +  Sight, 


92  On  the  Teaching 

Study  10. 

Proceeding  by  the  order  of  tabulation,  i  is  the  next 
sound  which  can  be  taken  finally.  (See  p.  172.)  The 
children  are  asked  what  they  learnt  about  this  sound,  when 
final,  in  the  "  Steps  to  Reading."  They  will  probably 
remember  that  it  likes  to  appear  twice  at  the  end  of  many 
words  which  take  one  step.  (See  pp.  7,  9,  11,  13  of 
"Steps  to  Beading.") 

Symbols : 

1.  sh 

2.  a  J3.  The  two  symbols  are  taken  by 

3.  I  I      \         one  child.     See  Note,  p.  55. 
See  p.  80. 

(The  examples  of  a  +  I  I,  as  in  all,  will  come  in  a  later 
Reader.) 

The  text  of  Study  10  gives  several  examples  of  words 
ending  in  I  I. 

The  children  notice  I  +  k  "by  herself "  in  the  word 
"  milk,"  see  line  5. 

On  the  colon,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  120. 

Capitals ;  *  S  h  cf.  s  h. 

Y      cf.  y. 

Note  on  Y  in  Y  6  S.  Y  is  treated  as  a  vowel  in  yes 
and  similar  words,  as  the  transition  from  the  semi-vocalic 
i  to  its  pronunciation  as  a  continuant  is  almost  imperceptible. 

Jack's  cat,  when  in  health,  is  a  beautiful  Persian. 
Suggestion. — Drawings  of  Jack's  cat. 
*  See  Note  on  digraphs  on  p.  30. 


of  English  Reading  93 

Study  11. 

We  now  pass  over  several  friends  in  the  Tabulating 
Frame,  and  take  s  h  as  our  final  sound. 

r  is  not  yet  used  as  a  final  letter  (see  Note  on  p.  55). 

As  so  few  useful  words  can  be  built  with  the  con- 
tinuants preceding  S  h  as  finals,  I  did  not  think  it 
necessary  to  give  special  Studies  on  them. 

Symbols  : 

1.  a 

2.  sh 

See  Note  on  p.  80. 

The  first  eight  words  having  been  gained,  the  story 
introduces : — 

smash 

clash 

flash 

slash 

splash 

crash 

thrash. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.         Kingst*on,  very. 

H.  +  S.     Dobbin,  getting  ;  cf. 

"Further  Notes,"  p.  127  (e). 
On  the  semicolon,  see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  120. 
The  word  for  writing  introduces  S  h,  see  p.  143  ibid. 
Capitals;  K  cf.  k. 

C  cf.  c. 

The  children  have  a  new  friend  in  Dan's  nag,  Dobbin. 
*  For  reduced  vowels,  see  page  29. 


94  On  the  Teaching 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  horse,  and  drawings 
of  Dobbin.  His  bran  mash  will  recall  the  associations  ol 
Study  8.  Nature  Lesson  on  an  ash  tree. 

Study  12. 

Three  sounds  in  the  Frame  are  passed  over  and  not  yet 
used  as  finals : 

C  h,  the  "  sister"  of  S  h,  which  will  require  n  or  I  on 
its  left  hand ; 

S  (as  in  treasure),  the  brother  of  s  h,  which  lives  in 
rather  difficult  words  (see  p.  75); 

h,  which  is  silent  when  final,  and  would  therefore 
require  a  yellow  dress. 

X  (blue)  six. 

Note. — This  symbol  is  taught  before  the  reading  of  the 
last  lines  of  Study  3  (see  p.  84). 

It  is  introduced  in  a  story  about  Nan,  who  wished  to 
clean  six  tin  pans  (see  right-hand  part  of  picture  heading 
Study  32,  and  Note  on  Double  Sounds,  p.  4). 

The  word  six  is  repeated  by  all  in  chorus  and  one  ol 
the  children  is  asked  to  give  the  sounds  in  it. 

The  child  sounds 

s    i     k    *s 

The  four  sounds  having  been  given,  the  analysis  of  X  is 
gained  before  the  symbol  is  seen. 

They  are  told  that  in  some  words  these  two  sounds  will 
be  represented  by  a  sign  which  they  have  not  yet  had. 

The  symbol  X  (blue)  is  shown,  and  the  lesson  continues 
as  on  p.  38,  sections  7  to  14. 

The  children  are  asked  in  which  column  it  must  live, 
*  Blue  s  as  in  sun. 


of  English  Reading  95 

and  they  decide  that  it  must  have  a  home  among  the  double 
sounds  (see  Plate  1).     See  p.  85,  lines  1,  2. 

Study  12  gives  the  children  opportunities  for  revising 
X.  They  will  see  how  careful  the  eye  must  be  in  remem- 
bering when  to  use  this  sign. 

Note. — It  is  advisable  for  the  teacher  to  tell  the  story 
which  introduces  words  containing  X,  as,  through  want  of 
experience,  the  children  may  suggest  many  words  in  which 
it  does  not  appear  (e.g.  loacks,  hicks). 

Symbols : 

1.  t 

2.  a 

3.  X 
See  Note  on  p.  80. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.     Into,  very. 

H.  x  8.     Pocket  (cf.  cricket,  p.  91). 

Capital:  M  cf.  m. 

Suggestions.— Nature  Lesson  on  flax,  and  seeds  sown 
by  the  children,  who  would  be  much  interested  in  watching 
their  growth.  See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  62. 

They  will  probably  have  noticed  that  dogs  and  cats  eat 
grass  as  a  tonic. 

Study  13. 

If  the  children  have  not  already  discovered  the  sounds 
in  c  h  (as  in  chat},  they  might  now  be  invited  to  give 
suggestions. 

They  may  at  once  sound  t  (2ub)  and  S  h   («Mp),  but 


96  On  the  Teaching 

should  this  analysis  not  be  forthcoming,  they  might  be 
asked  to  close  their  eyes  and  to  sound  C  h  (as  in  chat}  in 
chorus,  noticing  carefully  what  the  tongue  does.  This  will 
probably  help  them  to  the  gaining  of  t,  and  the  second 
part  =  sh  as  in  ship,  will  follow  quite  easily. 

Having  discovered  the  sounds  in  c  h,  the  children  are 
told  that  in  many  words  the  "  sneezing  sister  "  shows  herself 
more  fully.  The  eyes  must  be  friendly  in  helping  to  notice 
in  what  words  she  appears  so  unreservedly. 

t  C  h  (match'). 

A  story  is  told  about  Dan,  who  took  his  lantern  and 
match  box  with  him,  when  he  went  to  meet  Jack  and  Pat 
(see  picture  at  the  end  of  the  text  of  Study  15,  and  Note 
on  Double  Sounds,  p.  4). 

For  the  lesson,  see  pp.  37-40. 

The  children  discover  the  sounds  m     a     t  C  h. 

They  decide  that  t  C  h  must  be  dressed  in  blue. 

The  trigraph  t  C  h  is  shown,  and  the  lesson  continues 
as  on  p.  38,  sections  7-12. 

t  C  h  is  placed  by  one  of  the  children  in  the  column 
for  double  sounds,  under  C  h.  (See  Plate  1.) 

For  building  the  words  of  Study  13,  the  symbols  are 
taken  in  the  following  order  : — 

1.  p 

2.  a 

3.  tch 

See  Note  on  p.  80. 

The  children  may  like  to  lengthen  some  of  these  words 
(e.g.  catching,  scratching). 


of  English  Reading  97 

In  the  text,  the  word  h  U  t  C  h  gives  a  further 
example  of  t  C  h. 

The  writing  of  the  new  "  pet  word "  (see  "  Further 
Notes,"  p.  143)  will  help  to  impress  it  upon  the  children's 
minds. 

Word  for  stepping. — H.,  bringing.     (See  p.  89.) 

Suggestions. — The  children  might  draw  Pat's  pet  rat 
running  out  of  the  hutch.  If  they  have  kept  pet  rats,  they 
will  enjoy  telling  their  experiences. 

Study  14. 

This  Study  is  to  give  practice  in  the  use  of  blue  S  (as 
in  sun)  and  black  S  (as  in  crabs). 

See  p.  22,  lines  1-10. 

All  the  words  in  columns  1,  2,  3  have  appeared  in  past 
Studies,  and  this  lesson  might  therefore  be  taken  in  the 
following  manner : — 

1.  A  story  is  begun,  introducing  the  word  cap.     Kefer- 
ence  might  be  made  to  the  crab  which  got  into  Pat's  cap, 
as  the  children  delight  in  reviving  old  associations ;  or  an 
entirely  new  story  might  be  told  about  some  of  the  children 
in  the  class. 

2.  The  word  cap  is  repeated  by  all  in  chorus. 

3.  One  of  the  children  is  asked  to  sound  it  (c  a  p), 
whilst  the  class  listens  critically. 

4.  If  all  approve  of  the  given  sounds,  the  word  is  built 
by  "  express  train  "  (see  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  100,  101)  in 
the  Frame. 

G 


98  On  the  Teaching 

5.  All  print  the  word  on  their  black-boards  (or  slates) 
in  colour,  cap 

leaving  a  space  to  the  right  of  it. 

6.  When  the  black-boards  (or  slates)  have  been  examined, 
the  teacher  prints  it  on  the  special  b.b.  on  which  this  study 
is  growing  up. 

7.  The  story  is  continued,  the  word  caps  being  intro- 
duced.    The  children  explain  why  the  word  caps  was  used 
rather  than  cap. 

8.  When   this   has   been    gained   from   them,   a   child 
sounds  caps. 

9.  If  the  class  approves  of  the  given  sounds,  all  sound 
in  chorus. 

10.  They  are  asked  what  sound  has  been  added  to  cap 
to  give  caps. 

11.  Having  gained  s  (sun),  Alfred  adds  S  to  the  word 
C  a  p  in  the  building  part  of  the  Frame. 

12.  The  class  decides  whether  his  work  is  correct. 

13.  Then  all  print  the  word  on  their  black-boards  (or 
slates)  in  colour,  to  the  right  of 

Cap,  thus — C  a  p  S.     (See  Plate  4.) 
Some  of  the  children  may  notice  that  the  "  sister M  p 
takes  "  sister  "  s.     But  should  they  fail  to  observe  this  at 
once,  they  are  almost  sure  to  remark  it  by  the  time  the 
teacher  has  added 

hat  h  ats 

sack  sacks 

to  the  work  already  on  the  special  b.b. 

These  words  are  handled  in  a  similar  manner  to  C  a  p, 
caps.     (See  sections  1-13  above.) 


of  English  Reading  99 

Column  2. — Having  revised  the  words  of  column  1, 
column  2  is  gained  by  the  same  steps  as  those  taken  in 
sections  1-13  of  the  previous  lesson. 

By  the  end  of  the  lesson,  column  2  will  have  been 
recorded  on  the  special  b.b. 

The  children  will  notice  that  the  "  brother  "  final  con- 
sonants of  column  2,  b,  d,  g,  have  each  taken  a  "brother" 
8  (black). 

This  leads  to  comparison  with  column  1.  The  children 
will  see  that  the  form  of  the  symbol  is  the  same  in  the  final 
consonant  in  C  a  p  S  and  in  c  £L  b  S,  though  the  sound  in 
the  former  is  voiceless,  in  the  latter  voiced. 

They  repeat  all  the  words  of  column  1  and  column  2  in 
chorus,  giving  the  singular  and  plural  form  of  each  word. 
Their  appreciation  of  the  difference  between  the  sounds 
will  be  intensified  if  they  close  their  eyes  whilst  uttering 
each  pair. 

Column  3. — This  is  gained  in  the  same  way  as  column 
2  ;  the  nasals,  m,  n,  n  g,  are  used  finally,  and,  being 
voiced,  take  S  (black).  See  Note,  p.  36. 

In  a  later  lesson,  after  revising  columns  1,  2,  3,  the 
sentences  of  Study  14  are  read. 

Study  15. 

The  Study  heading  this  page  varies  a  little  from  those 
taken  hitherto.  The  children  will  have  had  two  or  three 
symbols  following  the  vowel  in  previous  lesson  (see  Studies 
5,  9,  10,  11,  13),  but  in  the  case  of  these,  the  symbols 
were  either  representative  of  one  sound,  or,  as  with  t  C  h, 
the  sounds  coalesced  sufficiently  to  allow  us  to  rank  the 


ioo  On  the  Teaching 

trigraph  as  a  double  sound.  In  the  present  Study  m 
and  p  each  have  their  own  sound,  m  being  voiced,  p 
voiceless. 

1.  A  story  is  told  introducing  the  word  damp. 

2.  The  children  repeat  this  word  in  chorus. 

3.  They  are  asked  to  discover  all  the  sounds  in  "  damp," 
and  their  attention  is  specially  directed  to  the  two  follow- 
ing a. 

4.  Having  gained  m,  p,  one  of  the  children  points  to 
these  symbols  in  the  Tabulating  Frame. 

5.  They  may  notice  that  both  are  lip  (or  "  front-door  ") 
sounds,  which  makes  their  utterance  in  succession  extremely 
easy.     Should  they  fail  to  observe  this  at  this  early  stage, 
wider  experience  (see  Studies  35  and  60)  will  lead  them  to 
the  discovery.     (Cf.  Studies  16,  17,  33,  36.) 

Symbols  : 

1.  d 

2.  a 

3.  m 

4.  p 
See  Note  on  p.  80. 

Having  gained  the  first  four  words,  the  story  is  con- 
tinued to  introduce  : —     cramp 

tramp 
stamp. 

See  Children's  Work,  III.  (facing  p.  41).    (See  pp.  3,  4.) 
Word  for  stepping. — H.  +  8.,  Dobbin, 
Capital:  B  cf.  b. 

This  capital  letter  appeared  in  the  "  Steps,"  p.  15. 


of  English  Reading  101 

On  the  joining  of  a  to  m  in  the  word  suggested  for 
writing,  see  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  143,  144. 

Suggestions. — Revision  of  the  lesson  on  a  horse 
(Dobbin)  suggested  for  Study  11,  and,  in  connection  with 
the  champing  of  the  bit,  special  reference  to  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  teeth,  drawings  of  which  might  be  made  by 
the  children.  They  will  notice  that  the  gap  between 
the  molars  and  front  teeth  allows  of  the  placing  of  a  bit  in 
a  horse's  mouth  with  little  discomfort.  They  will  recognise 
that  in  driving,  care  must  be  taken  not  to  drag  at  the 
reins,  as  it  is  painful  to  the  horse  and  ends  in  destroying 
the  sensitiveness  of  the  mouth. 

Study  16. 

The  two  final  sounds  are  n  and  d.  They  are  gained 
from  the  children  in  the  same  manner  as  that  suggested  for 
Study  15.  (See  sections  1-5.) 

Eeference  to  the  Tabulating  Frame  (section  5)  will 
remind  the  children  that  these  two  sounds  are  produced  in 
the  front  part  of  the  mouth. 

Symbols : 

1.  b 

2.  a 

3.  n 

4.  d 

See  Note  on  p.  80. 

See  Suggestions  for  the  words  of  a  group,  pp.  78  and 
79  of  "Further  Notes." 

Words  for  stepping. — H.y  splendid. 

H.  +  S.,  bucket.    (See  p.  89.) 


io2  On  the  Teaching 

Capitals:  H  cf.  h. 

L  cf.  I. 

The  children  of  our  family,  with  the  exception  of  Dan 
and  Lily  (see  p.  108),  are  now  at  the  sea-side. 

Suggestions. — A  lesson  on  sand  and  a  chat  about  life 
at  the  sea-side,  for  the  illustration  of  which  sand-trays 
would  lend  themselves  very  happily.  (See  p.  33.) 

The  children  would  enjoy  painting  sea-weed  and  model- 
ling shells. 

The  crab  is  an  old  friend  (see  p.  83,  lines  1-3).  The 
children  may  like  to  revise  their  talk  about  it. 

Study  17. 

Before  evolving  the  words  in  this  Study,  the  children 
are  asked  to  discover  another  double  sound,  the  symbol  for 
which  they  are  now  going  to  learn. 

They  are  asked  what  double  sounds  they  have  already 
had.  Some  will  remember  : — 

C  h     of  Study  3,  with  its  "pet  word"  cAat. 
X  „      3,  „  sia?. 

j  »      4,  „  /ump. 

tch  ,,13,  „  match. 

The  above  double  sounds  are  already  hanging  in  the  Tabu- 
lating Frame,  and  the  children  will  be  delighted  to  point  to 
them.  They  may  also  like  to  recall  various  words  contain- 
ing them  (e.g.  cAamp,  wa#,  /am, 


of  English  Reading  103 

n  k   (tank). 

For  the  introduction  of  the  new  double  sound,  a  story  is 
told  introducing  the  word  tank. 

(See  picture  heading  Study  17,  and  Note  on  Double 
Sounds,  p.  4.) 

This  word  is  repeated  by  all  in  chorus. 

One  of  the  children  is  then  asked  to  give  the  sounds 
contained  in  it. 

The  result  will  be  : 

t    a    ng    k 

They  are  told  that  when  the  sound  ng  meets  k,  the 
sound  ng  is  represented  by  one  letter  only. 

The  digraph  is  shown,  and  a  description  gained  from 
the  children,  who  then  print  n  k.  (See  p.  38,  sections  7 
to  12.) 

It  is  placed  by  one  of  the  children  in  the  home 
arranged  for  it  in  the  Tabulating  Frame.  (See  Plate  1.) 

Note. — Although  the  two  sounds  in  n  k  are  as  distinct 
as  in  the  case  of  m  +  p  and  n  +  t,  I  thought  it  wiser  to 
treat  n  k  as  a  digraph,  lest  the  children  should  insert  g 
between  n  and  k. 

In  the  next  lesson  it  is  used  for  building. 

Symbols : 

1.  b  (  3.  The  digraph   is    taken 

2.  a  \     from  the  column  arranged 

3.  nk       \.    for  double  sounds. 
See  Note  on  p.  80. 

It  is  advisable  to  devote  at  least  two  lessons  to  the 
building  of  the  words  of  Study  17. 


104  On  the  Teaching 

The  first  five  words  having  been  built,  the  story  is 
continued  to  introduce  : — p  rank 

drank 
f  ran  k 
*  F  r an  k 
shrank 
plank 
blank. 

*  The  proper  name  "  Frank  "  requires  a  capital  not  yet 
learnt.  The  children  will  probably  have  noticed  F  at  the 
back  of  f . 

For  the  revision  of  n  k,  see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  91. 

See  also  p.  143  ibid. 

Words  for  stepping. — H  +  S.,  bucket, 

biggest.     (See  p.  89.) 

Capital;  F  cf.  f. 

Frank  is  the  garden  boy,  and  his  timely  arrival  at  a 
critical  moment  will  endear  him  to  the  children.  (See  text 
of  Study  17.) 

The  crabs  will  revive  the  associations  of  Study  2. 

Study  18. 

This  page  contains  a  very  important  Study,  and  the  text 
will  be  a  test  page  for  the  gaining  of  words  of  two  syllables. 

In  the  words  of  the  seventeen  previous  Studies  a  kept 
the  sound  that  it  was  found  to  have  in  b  a  t ;  the  children 
are  now  going  to  be  introduced  to  several  words  in  which  it 
speaks  differently. 


of  English  Reading  105 

W  a  (wasp). 

A  story  is  told  introducing  the  word  wasp. 

All  repeat  "  wasp  "  in  chorus,  and  one  of  the  children 
is  asked  to  sound  it. 

Jack  sounds  W     O     S      p. 

The  teacher  then  prints  W  a  S  p  in  white  chalk  on  the 
b.b.  May  comes  out  and  prints  it  in  colour,  and  the 
children  quickly  notice  the  symbol  for  the  vowel  sound. 

They  discover  that  when  preceded  by  W,  the  sound  of 
a  (as  in  bat)  is  modified  to  O  (as  in  top).  (As,  with  few 
exceptions  (see  Study  12),  the  variations  from  this  rule  will 
not  be  met  with  until  a  later  stage,  when  wider  experience 
will  have  prepared  the  children  for  meeting  them,  I  think 
it  advisable  to  let  them  always  utter  the  two  sounds  W  a 
(as  in  wasp)  together,  in  order  to  make  them  quite  familiar 
with  this  modification  of  sound,  and  the  Study  is  therefore 
headed  wa.  See  Study  18.) 

The  word  W  a  S  p  is  now  built  in  the  Frame. 

Note. — In  building  words  of  the  "  wasp  "  party,  a  child 
takes  the  two  signs  W  and  a  simultaneously  (one  in  each 
hand)  and  places  them  in  the  building  part.  They  also 
"  go  home  "  at  the  same  moment. 

When  pointing  out  W  a  S  p  W  a  words,  the  children 
point  to  W  and  a  simultaneously.  (See  "  Further  Notes," 
p.  102.) 

The  eight  words  of  the  "  wasp  "  party  are  built,  and  the 
word  W  h  a  t  is  reserved  for  a  later  lesson. 

See  Note  on  p.  80.     See  Suggestions,  p.  108. 
See  also  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  143. 


106  On  the  Teaching 

The  children  now  read  the  text  of  Study  17  from 
"  Lily  and  Dan  "  to  "  the  bank."  (See  p.  108.) 

what 

It  is  advisable  to  make  this  word  the  subject  of  a 
special  lesson. 

A  story  is  told  introducing  what. 

The  children  discover  the  sounds  in  it. 

The  teacher  then  prints  the  word  in  white  chalk  on 
the  b.b. 

Tommy  is  asked  to  come  out  and  print  it  in  colour  on 
the  b.b. 

The  children  notice  that  the  whip  W  h  agrees  with 
a  to  utter  the  sounds  that  precede  t. 

A  child  gets  the  digraph  w  h  and  a  simultaneously 
(cf.  Note,  p.  105)  and  places  them  in  the  building  part. 

The  word  is  printed  and  illustrated. 

The  children  enjoy  printing  little  phrases  and  illus- 
trating them  :  e.g.  What  fun  !  What  a  pity  !  What  is  Jack 
getting?  (See  Note  on  p.  202  of  "Further  Notes,"  and 
cf.  small  type  on  p.  224  ibid.} 

The  word  what  is  also  turned  into  writing,  see 
"  Further  Notes,"  p.  143. 

The  text  of  Study  18,  "What  can  ...  to  it,"  is  read 
later. 

g  (ma^ic). 

A  story  is  told  of  a  magic  wand,  which  was  waved  in 
the  air  in  order  to  send  all  the  children  to  sleep. 

(See  picture  heading  p.  61  of  Book  I.,  and  Note  on  p. 
4  ;  cf.  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  239,  240.) 


of  English  Reading  107 

They  will  be  only  too  charmed  to  illustrate  this,  and  the 
pointer  will  be  gladly  seized  upon  to  do  office  as  a  magic  wand. 
Its  wonderful  power  will  be  proved  by  the  deep  slumber  into 
which  they  fall  when  it  is  waved  by  the  magician  chosen. 

One  of  the  children  is  asked  to  sound  the  word 
magic,  then  all  sound  it  in  chorus.  The  sounds  will 
be  familiar,  but  they  have  something  new  to  learn.  They 
will  remember  that  their  little  friend  "  the  fat  baby "  C 
(cat)  took  another  sound  when  before  certain  red  friends. 
They  will  find  that  her  brother  g  often  takes  a  double  sound 
before  the  same  red  friends. 

(The  red  friend  e  will  be  familiar  to  them.  See  p.  69. 
In  magic  they  will  discover  another  red  friend,  before  which 
this  change  takes  place.) 

In  a  later  Study  they  will  consider  the  reason  for  this. 
(See  p.  123.) 

The  lesson  proceeds  as  on  pp.  37-40. 

Having  gained  the  double  sound  g,  they  must  add  it  to 
the  Tabulating  Frame.  Its  place  is  below  the  "sneezing 

sister  "  t  Q  {J     (See  Plate  1.) 

They  will  see  that  it  is  not  the  only  symbol  with  that 
sound,  as  j  is  already  there.  (See  p.  86,  lines  1-4.) 

They  will  probably  remember  meeting  j  in  the  word 
jam,  and  capital  J  in  Jack. 

They  can  now  build  the  word  m  a  g  i  C,  taking  g  from 
the  column  for  double  sounds.  They  print  and  illustrate  it 
on  their  b.b.  and  give  sentences  containing  it. 

For  the  writing  lesson,  see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  143. 

The  text  of  Study  18,  "  But  ...  get  in,"  is  read  later. 


io8    On  the  Teaching  of  English  Reading 

The  children  will  discover  that  the  text  has  many  words 
in  it  which  take  two  steps. 

They  have  had  practice  in  words  of  this  kind  in 
previous  Studies,  and  now  they  are  going  to  have  an  ex- 
amination to  see  how  they  can  manage  them  (very  and 
magic  will  be  familiar  and  lily  appeared  in  the  "  Steps  to 
Eeading";  for  the  use  of  the  capital  in  Lily,  see  p.  63). 

They  will  find  a  friend  from  amongst  the  heading  words, 
growing  a  little  longer  in  the  text  (w  a  t  C  h  i  n  g).  This 
leaves  six  new  words  which  take  two  steps,  and  they  must 
try  to  discover  them  all.  See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  129  (A). 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  Lily,  study,  very,  magic, 
H.  +  $.,  Daddy's,  watching,  flitting,  tunn*el,  unless,  cannot. 

For  the  stepping  of  words  in  this  and  following  Studies, 
see  p.  89  and  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  122-129. 

A  new  little  friend  appears  in  Lily,  aged  7,  who  is  still 
at  home.  She  and  Dan  will  go  shortly  with  Daddy  to  the 
sea-side,  to  join  the  others.  See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  131. 

Suggestions. — If  a  Nature  Lesson  on  a  wasp,  with 
pictures  of  the  interior  of  its  nest,  could  be  given  previous 
to  this  Study,  the  children  would  consider  the  incidents  in 
the  text  quite  the  result  of  magic. 

*  See  pp.  29  and  34. 


ON  THE  SECOND  PRIMER. 

THE  children  have  had  exhaustive  Studies  with  a  (bat) 
as  the  vowel  sound.  They  are  now  going  to  use  i  (ill)  and 
U  (pull). 

Illustrations  of  i,  y  (kitty)  and  U  will  be  found  on  the 
pages  preceding  Studies  19  and  46  of  the  Second  Primer. 

Study  19. 

p  is  taken  as  the  final  consonant. 
Symbols : 

1.  p 

2.  i 

3.  p 

See  Suggestions  on  p.  80. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.y  Lily. 

H.  +  S.t  Neddy. 

The  children  are  still  at  the  sea-side.  Daddy,  Lily  and 
Dan  join  them  there ;  Neddy,  the  donkey,  is  a  new  friend. 

Suggestions. — If  this  lesson  could  be  preceded  by  a 
Nature  Lesson  on  a  donkey,  it  would  make  Neddy  doubly 
interesting.  See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  62. 

On  the  words  suggested  for  writing  in  connection  with 
the  Second  Primer,  see  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  144,  145. 
On  Dictation,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  158. 

109 


no  On  the  Teaching 

For  the  Supplementary  Chapters  bearing  on  the  Second 
Primer,  see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  59. 

Study  20. 

b  is  taken  as  the  final  consonant. 
Symbols : 

1.  b 

2.  i 

3.  b 
See  p.  80. 

Word  for  stepping. — H.  +  S.,  bucket. 

Suggestions. — Drawings  of  a  ship  with  mainsail  and 
jib,  the  word  j  j  b  being  printed  in  colour  by  the  children 
on  that  sail  in  their  drawing.  Some  fortunate  owner  of  a 
ship  might  bring  it  for  the  illustration  of  this  Study. 

Study  21. 

t  is  taken  as  the  final  consonant. 
Symbols : 

1.  p 

2.  I 

3.  t 
See  p.  80. 

The  word  knit,  which  the  children  would  be  very 
likely  to  suggest,  gives  an  opportunity  for  the  use  of  a  yellow 
(or  silent)  letter.  (See  Plate  11.) 

The  children  much  enjoy  pronouncing  the  word  with  a 
sounded  k  (as  in  the  olden  days),  and  comparing  it  with  the 
present  pronunciation.  This  word  will  warn  them  that  the 
eye  must  be  friendly.  See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  127  (/). 


of  English  Reading  in 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  Philip,  badly,  singing. 

H.  +  S.,  quickly,  unless. 
Capital :  *P  h  c/.  p  h. 

(See  Note  on  digraphs  on  p.  30.) 

Philip,  aged  11,  the  second  boy  of  the  family,  appears 
for  the  first  time.  His  interesting  name  suggests  an 
imaginary  voyage  to  Greece.  (See  p.  62.)  He  is  very 
fond  of  riding,  and  has  a  horse  of  his  own,  to  which  the 
children  will  be  introduced  later. 

See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  131. 

Suggestion. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  torn-tit  in  connec- 
tion with  Philip's  pet  torn-tit. 

Study  22. 

d  is  taken  as  the  final  consonant. 
Symbols : 

1.  b 

2.  i 

3.  d 

See  p.  80.     See  Note  on  p.  25. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.y  pantry,  hunting. 

Dick  appears  for  the  first  time.  He  is  Pat's  special 
friend,  and  has  come  to  stay  with  him.  His  pet  kid  has 
also  come  on  a  visit. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  goat,  with  drawings 
of  it  by  the  children. 

*  Children  who  have  been  through  the  "Steps  to  Reading"  (see 
p.  9)  will  be  familiar  with  P  h. 


ii2  On  the  Teaching 

Study  23. 

C  k  taken  as  the  final  sound,  the  two  symbols  being 
regarded  as  the  regular  doubling  of  k.     (See  p.  47.) 
Symbols  : 

1.  p 

2.  i 

3.  C  k}  See  Note  on  p.  48. 

When  the  first  nine  words  have  been  taken,  the  story 
introduces : —  chick 

stick 
prick 
brick 
trick 
quick. 

See  Note  on  p.  78  of  "Further  Notes." 
Words  for  Stepping. — H.,  lily. 

H.  +  S.,  cannot,  quickly,  Fanny. 

Fanny  appears  for  the  first  time.  She  is  one  of  the 
maids,  and  is  a  very  kind  friend  to  the  children.  (See 
Studies  27,  29,  32,  33  and  onwards.) 

The  children  may  like  to  build  the  word  bricks, 
when  they  meet  it  in  the  text. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  lily  and  drawings 
from  the  children.  (See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  62.) 

Study  24. 

g  is  taken  as  the  final  consonant. 
Symbols  : 

1.  p 

2.  i 

3  g 


of  English  Reading  113 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  grunting. 
H.  +  S.,  piggy. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  pig,  and  drawings 
from  the  children  of  the  pig  running  to  the  pond.  They 
might  model  the  pond  in  their  sand- trays. 

Study  25. 

m  is  taken  as  the  final  consonant. 
Symbols : 

1.  T 

2.  i 

3.  m 

See  p.  80. 

"When  the  children  have  handled  the  first  five  words, 
the  story  introduces  : — p  r  i  m 

brim 
trim 
grim. 

They  may  be  able  to  suggest  the  last  three  words  of 
this  Study,  for  past  experience  will  have  taught  them  what 
an  active  part  blue  S  takes  as  an  initial  sound. 

They  now  use  it  for  building : — S  k  i  m 

slim 
swim. 

Note. — In  the  Writing  lesson,  care  will  be  required  in 
joining  i  to  m  (cf.  Note  on  pp.  143,  144  of  "Further 
Notes  "). 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  into. 

H.  +  S.,  quickly. 

H 


ii4  On  the  Teaching 

A  new  pet  is  introduced  in  the  text,  "  Tim,"  Jack's  big 
dog,  which  is  a  Newfoundland.  A  new  friend  appears  in 
Jim,  the  boy  who  looks  after  the  horses  and  other  animals 
of  the  home  farm. 

Suggestions. — Lesson  on  Newfoundland  dogs  or  stories 
about  them.  Modelling  of  a  milk-pan  in  clay. 

Study  26. 

n  is  taken  as  the  final  consonant. 
Symbols : 

1.  p 

2.  I 

3.  n 

See  p.  80. 

"When  the  children  have  taken  the  first  eleven  words, 
the  story  introduces  : — S  p  i  n 

skin. 

For  the  joining  of  i  to  n  in  the  Writing  lesson,  cf. 
Note  on  p.  113. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  sev*en,  lifted  (*see  p.  29). 
This  page  introduces  us  to  another  of  Jack's  pets,  his 
gold-fish 

Suggestions. — Grains  of  corn  shown  in  connection  with 
the  bin. 

Nature  Lesson  on  a  gold-fish,  which  is  such  a  usual 
pet  (see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  63,  lines  5-7). 


of  English  Reading  115 

Study  27. 

n  g  is  taken  as  the  final  consonant. 
Symbols : 

1.  k 

2.  i 

3.  ng 

See  Suggestions  in  "Further  Notes,"  p.  80. 
When  the  children  have  handled  the  first  six  words, 
the  story  introduces  : — f  ling 
sling 
swing 
sting 
spring 
string. 

See  Suggestions  for  the  Writing  lesson  in  "Further 
Notes,"  pp.  144,  146. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  ringing, 
H.  +  S.,  Fanny. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  heath  with  ling  grow- 
ing on  it,  which  would  suggest  bees  and  wasps.  The  children 
will  remember  the  wasp  in  which  Dan  was  so  interested. 
(See  Study  18.)  If  "The  Lost  Doll"  could  be  taught  in 
the  Poetry  lesson,  Dolly  might  be  lost  on  this  very  heath. 

A  song  about  swinging. 

Study  28. 

All  the  monosyllables  printed  in  colour  are  old  friends, 
and  this  Study  can  therefore  be  taken  partly  as  dictation. 


ii6  On  the  Teaching 

1.  A  sentence  is  given  containing  the  word  pack,  e.g., 
"Lily  wanted  to  pack  her  trunk."     The  children  are  asked 
to  print  pack  in  colours  on  their  b.b.  or  slates.    (See  Stage  1.) 

The  b.b.  or  slates  are  examined,  and  the  teacher  prints 
the  word  on  the  special  b.b. 

Stage  1.   pack  (The  children  then  build  it  in  the 

Stage  2.  packing    (Frame  by  the  "  express  train  "  plan. 

2.  The  story  continues  :  "  As   Lily   was   packing   her 
trunk,  Jack's  cat  came  up  to  her."     All  repeat  packing  in 
chorus,  and  they  are  asked  to  tell  what  has  happened  to 
the  word  pack.     They  will  find  that  it  goes  into  two  parts. 

By  stepping  the  syllables  (see  p.  25  and  Note,  p.  48) 
they  will  discover  that  i  walks  off  with  the  second  part, 
followed  by  n  g.  We  have  now  gained  the  sounds  which 
are  to  be  added  to  pack. 

3.  The    children    add    ing    to    pack    which   is 
already  in  the  Frame.    They  then  print   packing  on 
their    b.b.,    under    the    word    pack.      This    will    cause 
i  n  g    to    stand    out    conspicuously.      (See    Stage    2    and 
Plate  5.)     It  is  also  recorded  on  the  special  b.b. 

It  is  most  important  that  each  pair  of  words  in  Study 
28  should  be  carefully  printed,  so  as  to  show  that  the  main 
word  has  had  nothing  added  to  it,  and  therefore  remains 
unaltered  by  the  addition  of  ing. 

The  words  of  the  left-hand  column  are  taken  first  and 
are  handled  as  suggested  above.  For  the  words  of  the 
right-hand  column,  it  may  be  advisable  to  let  the  children 
point  to  the  signs  they  think  of  printing  (see  Note,  p.  25, 
and  cf.  "Further  Notes,"  Stage  3,  p.  155). 


of  English  Reading  117 

In  the  first  five  pairs  of  words,  the  children  may 
notice  that  the  weight  of  ing  is  supported  by  the 
"  two  sisters "  (the  double  sign,  c  k)  or  by  the  digraphs, 

ng,  sh. 

(This  will  prepare  them  for  the  doubling  of  the  con- 
sonants when  ing  is  added  to  such  words  as  nap ;  a  Study 
of  this  kind  appears  later.  See  p.  140.) 

.  (  will  probably  excite  remark,  for,  in  the 

.  \  five    preceding    examples,    the    children 

\  will  have  seen  double   signs  (e.g.  c  k), 

or  digraphs  (e.g.   n  g,  S  h)  between  a  (bat)  and    i   (ill). 

As  blue  X  is  an  old  friend  (see  p.  84),  they  know  that  it 

represents  a  double  sound  ( =  k  +  S). 

In  thank,  n  k  gives  an  example  of  a  double  sound 
represented  by  a  digraph. 

In  catch,  t  C  h  gives  an  example  of  a  double  sound 
represented  by  a  trigraph. 

In  stamp  and  want  m  +  p  and  n  +  t  bear  the  weight 

of  ing. 

On  w  a,  see  p.  105. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  stamping,  splashing, washing. 
H.  +  S.,  Neddy,  Dobbin,  quacking. 

The  sentences  bring  in  the  old  friends  Neddy  and 
Dobbin.  The  mention  of  the  duck  will  revive  the  associa- 
tions of  Study  5.  For  Nan's  cat,  see  Study  3. 

Study  29. 

I  I  is  taken  as  the  final  sound. 
The   children  are  asked  to  recall  the  word  in  which 


n8  On  the  Teaching 

a  (bat)  was  followed  by  II  (shall),  and  reference  is 
made  to  Study  10. 

Now  that  they  are  going  to  use  i  (ill)  before  1 1,  they 
will  find  that  many  words  can  be  made  which  take  one 
step,  and  in  which  they  will  find  I  appearing  twice,  though 
the  sound  is  heard  once,  only.  This  will  give  the  eye 
especial  work  to  do. 

The  symbols  are  taken  down  in  the  following  order : — 

1.  i 

2.  11}      2.  Seep.  92. 
See  Note  on  p.  80. 

The  word  gill,  containing  the  initial  g,  brother  to  k, 
will  revive  the  associations  of  Study  26,  if  the  children  had 
the  lesson  on  the  gold-fish  which  was  suggested. 

f  (see  last  words  of  Study  29)  give  oppor- 
"*      .         <  tunities  for  the  use  of  the  "sneezing  sister" 
(.  C  h  (cAat)  and  of  her  brother  g  (magic). 

Words  for  stepping. — H.  +  S.,  Fanny,  sitting. 

Suggestions. — Sand-modelling  of  hills  and  rivers  pre- 
vious to  the  above  Study.  Drawings  of  a  mill,  and  a 
Kindergarten  song  about  a  mill. 

An  ordinary  tumbler  might  be  brought  to  show  how 
much  milk  was  given  to  Jack's  cat. 


Study  30. 

So  many  words  ending  in  II  can  be  built    that   we 
have    a    second    Study   on  it.      This  contains  the  words 


of  English  Reading  119 

that  have  two  consonant  sounds  preceding  the  vowel 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,     mending,  ringing. 
H.  +  S.,  Dolly. 

Suggestions. — It  will  interest  the  children  to  notice 
how  different  animals  drink  (c/.  cat,  dog,  horse,  elephant). 

The  quills  in  Dolly's  hat  suggest  a  chat  about  other 
uses  of  quills,  and  one  might  be  cut  to  show  the  evolution 
of  a  pen.  The  children  will  notice  the  white  substance 
in  the  quill,  and  if  they  are  told  that  it  is  called  the 
"pith,"  they  will  be  prepared  for  the  building  of  that  word 
in  the  next  Study. 

Study   31. 

This  page  contains  words  ending  with  various  con- 
sonants, and  some  of  them  will  have  occurred  frequently  in 
the  text. 

As  f  and  S  are  so  often  doubled  at  the  end  of  a 
monosyllable,  I  made  a  point  of  introducing  if,  this,  is,  his, 
into  a  Study,  though  no  special  remark  need  be  made  to  the 
children,  unless  they  call  attention  to  it. 

The  word  pith  will  be  familiar  if  the  quill  of  the 
previous  lesson  was  discussed,  and  the  word  with  gives 
an  opportunity  for  comparing  the  final  sound  of  its  "brother" 
t  h  (black)  with  the  "  sister"  t  h  (blue)  of  p  i  t  h. 

For  the  building  of  the  above  words,  see  Suggestions 
and  Note  on  p.  80. 

The  story  is  continued  to  introduce  the  four  remaining 


120  On  the  Teaching 

words  with  S  h  as  the  final  consonant. 
Symbols : 

1.  d 

2.  i 

3.  sh 

See  p.  80. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  wishes,  into,  robin,  pity. 

E.  +  S.,  watching,  running,  sipping. 

Lily  is  still  recovering  from  her  chill,  and  is  therefore 
unable  to  share  in  Nan  and  Dan's  pleasures. 

Suggestions. — A  Nature  Lesson  on  a  water-rat,  which 
could  be  compared  with  Pat's  pet  rat.  A  chat  about  a 
robin,  which  would  probably  be  a  familiar  bird  to  the 
children. 

Study  32. 

Blue  X  (sir)  is  used  as  the  final  sound  for  the  first 
three  words.  It  is  taken  down  from  its  home  in  the  Frame 
by  one  of  the  children  and  placed  in  the  building  part. 

Lucy  is  asked  to  sound  it  and  to  give  the  "  pet  word." 
The  children  then  recall  the  words  of  Study  12.  They 
enjoy  hiding  these  in  sentences  and  choosing  some  one  from 
the  class  to  find  them  (cf.  suggestions  for  revising  words, 
pp.  264,  265  of  "Further  Notes.") 

Blue  X  is  then  replaced  in  its  home  and  the  children 
are  told  that  we  are  going  to  use  it  in  our  next  party  of 
words. 


of  English  Reading  121 

Symbols  : 

1.  m 

2.  i 

3.  X 

See  Note  on  p.  80. 

When  the  children  have  built  the  first  three  words,  they 
are  introduced  to  another  double  sound. 

X  (black)  e#act. 

A  story  is  told  about  Lily  who  put  the  exact  amount  of 
milk  into  her  dish.  (See  picture  heading  Study  32,  and 
Note  on  p.  4.) 

All  repeat  the  word  exact  in  chorus  and  discover  the 
sounds  in  it. 

Tom  sounds  e  g  *S  £L  C  t.      (*Black  S  as  in  crabs.) 

He  has  now  given  the  component  parts  of  the  double 

C 

sound  X  (g  "  brother  "  to  k  +  black  8  or  z). 

q 

The  symbol  is  shown,  a  description  gained,  and  then  all 
print  black  X.  (See  p.  38,  sections  7  to  14.) 

Suggestions  are  invited  as  to  its  home  in  the  Frame, 
and  as  the  children  will  see  that  it  is  the  brother  form  to 
blue  X,  they  will  decide  in  favour  of  its  living  beneath  that 
symbol,  in  the  column  arranged  for  double  sounds. 

When  one  of  the  children  has  put  it  in  its  home,  the 
word  exact  is  built  in  the  Frame,  printed  and 
illustrated. 

It  is  also  turned  into  writing,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p. 
145  ;  see  also  p.  91  ibid, 


122  On  the  Teaching 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  polish. 

H.  +  S.,  kitchen,  pudding,  exactly. 

For  the  word  pudding,  the  children  will  find,  by 
experiment,  that  it  is  the  sound  of  U,  as  in  pwll,  which 
is  required.  Cf.  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  184,  lines  16-19. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  hen  and  chickens, 
and  a  song  about  them. 

Study  33. 

n  k  is  taken  finally. 
Symbols : 

1.  i 

2.  n  k 

See  Note  on  p.  80. 

When  the  first  nine  words  have  been  built,  the  story 
is  continued  to  introduce  : — b  rink 

drink 

shrink. 

Suggestions. — Lesson  on  fur,  introducing  mink.  Ex- 
periments with  milk  for  extracting  spots  of  ink.  Experi- 
ments with  different  shrinkable  materials,  which  might  bring 
in  the  use  of  rulers  for  measurement. 

Study  34. 

The  words  of  this  Study  have  the  "  sneezing  sister " 
C  h  (c^at)  and  her  brother  g  (ma^ic)  as  final  sounds. 
(Cf.  Study  29.) 

The  sounds  and  symbols  are  familiar,  and  the  children 


of  English  Reading  123 

may   be    able  to   recall   the   context  in   which  the   "pet 
words"  first  appeared  (see  Studies  3  and  18). 
Symbols : 

1.  r 

2.  i 

3.  ch 

See  Note  on  p.  80. 

The  word  which  gives  an  opportunity  for  the  use  of  the 
digraph  w  h. 

The  writing  of  this  word  (see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  145) 
will  help  to  impress  it  upon  the  minds  of  the  children. 

The  second  party  of  words  in  this  Study  will  be  very 
interesting  to  the  children.  The  change  of  sound  that  g 
undergoes  when  followed  by  particular  red  friends  can  be 
explained  to  them  by  an  appeal  to  the  history  of  the 
language.  (See  p.  155.) 

In  magic,  g  was  before  i ;  the  other  red  friend  before 
which  it  often  has  this  sound  is  e. 

The  children  are  asked  to  sound  i  (HI)  and  6  (egg)  in 
chorus,  and  to  say  where  they  are  produced. 

Having  gained  the  answer,  they  are  asked  to  sound 

(°\ 
brother  to  k  land  to  say  where  that  is  produced. 
q/ 

They  are  thus  prepared  for  the  idea  of  g  changing  its 
sound  to  one  that  can  be  produced  in  the  front  part  of  the 
mouth. 

(When   this    point  was   under   discussion,  one  of    the  children 
remarked,  "  How  lazy  of  him  ! ") 


124  On  the  Teaching 

Symbols : 

1.  t 

2.  I  \    4.  The  m  a  g  i  C     g 

3.  n  >          and    e    are    taken 

4.  g  e  )          down  by  one  child. 
See  Note  on  p.  80. 

The  red  friend  at  the  end  of  the  word  will  not  cause  it 
to  take  two  steps,  and  this  may  excite  remark  on  the  part 
of  the  children,  who  may  question  its  presence.  Others 
may  notice  its  usefulness  in  telling  us  the  sound  that  g 
will  have.  This  final  e  is  drawn  in  the  air. 

When  singe  has  been  built,  one  of  the  children  is 
asked  to  remove  the  final  vowel.  The  others  see  that  this 
makes  the  word  look  like  sing  (see  Study  27). 

The  story  continues  and  introduces  : — f  P  i  n  g  6 

hinge 
twinge. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  visit,  Kingst*on  (*see  p.  29). 
H.  +  S.,   singeing,    Dobbin,  trotting, 
setting. 

Suggestions. — The  setting  sun  suggests  a  geography 
lesson  introducing  the  points  of  the  compass.  Having  con- 
sidered the  orientation  of  their  class-room,  they  draw  the 
main  points  of  the  compass  on  the  floor,  and,  having  decided 
which  is  the  west  of  the  room,  they  delight  in  "  setting " 
there,  the  rest  of  the  class  watching  the  gradual  disappear- 
ance of  the  orb  with  extreme  interest. 

The  children  also  learn  a  poem  about  the  setting  sun, 
which  they  illustrate  on  their  b.b.  or  slates, 


of  English  Reading  125 

Study  35. 

Having  exhausted  most  of  the  single  and  double  sounds 
as  finals,  the  children  now  take  two  separate  consonant 
sounds  finally. 

m  +  p  will  be  readily  suggested,  as  it  will  have  in- 
terested the  children  to  notice  that  these  two  "front- 
door" letters  are  very  fond  of  meeting.  (See  page  100, 
section  5.) 

Symbols : 

1.  I 

2.  i 

3.  m 

4.  p 
See  p.  80. 

Note. — The  word  suggested  for  writing  (rest,  see  "  Further 
Notes,"  p.  145),  appears  in  the  text. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  *along  (*see  p.  29). 

H.  +  S.t  kenn*el,  bucket. 
Tim  is  an  old  friend.     (See  Study  25.) 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  shrimp.  Drawings 
of  Tim  in  his  kennel. 

Study  36. 

n  + 1  are  taken  as  the  final  sounds. 
The  children  may  remember  that  n  and  d  went  out 
together  in  the  words  of  Study  16  of  the  First  Primer. 
For  notes  on  Study  16,  see  p.  101. 


126  On  the  Teaching 

Symbols : 

1.  t 

2.  i 

3.  n 

4.  t 

See  p.  80. 

The  word  suggested  for  writing  (jump,  see  "Further 
Notes,"  p.  145)  is  associated  with  Dobbin  (see  text). 

Word  for  stepping. — H.t  jumping. 

Suggestions. — The  children  would  be  interested  to  see 
lint  and  splints,  and  a  description  of  each  might  be  gained 
from  them. 

A  lesson  on  flint.     See  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  63. 

A  talk  about  mint,  which  might  be  grown  in  the 
school  garden. 

Study  37. 

The  Study  heading  this  page  can  be  taken  partly  as 
dictation,  and  the  method  employed  is  similar  to  that  sug- 
gested for  Study  28  (see  pp.  116,  117),  the  only  difference 
being  the  addition  of  e  d  (see  Stage  2)  rather  than  i  n  g 
(see  Plate  6).  Three  examples  are  given  of  words  ending 
in  t  and  three  of  words  ending  in  d.  The  stepping  of  the 
syllables  suggested  in  section  2  (see  p.  116)  shows  that 
when  e  d  is  added  to  final  t  or  d,  it  makes  that  word  take 
another  step. 

Note. — It  is  advisable  to  spend  two  lessons  on  these 
words,  so  that  the  children  may  fully  grasp  the  e  of  e  d. 


of  English  Reading  127 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  mended,  landed,  panted, 
rested,  wanted. 

Study  38. 

I  + 1  are  taken  as  final  sounds. 

Reference  to  the  Tabulating  Frame  will  show  the 
children  how  easy  it  is  for  these  two  sounds  to  follow  each 
other,  as  both  are  produced  with  the  tongue  in  the  front 
part  of  the  mouth.  (Gf.  Studies  16  and  36.) 

Symbols : 

1.  t 

2.  I 

3.  I 

4.  t 
See  p.  80. 

The  children  will  meet  several  long  words  in  the  text. 
They  will  enjoy  discovering  them  for  themselves  (see  Note 
on  p.  28  and  "Further  Notes,"  p.  129  (A). 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  visit,  velvet,  himself. 

H.  +  S.,  jacket,  butt*ons,  putting.     (*  See  p.  29.) 

Suggestions. — A  description  of  stilts  might  be  gained 
from  the  children  and  an  imaginary  journey  might  be  taken 
to  the  west  coast  of  France,  to  the  neighbourhood  of  the 
Landes.  This  would  call  into  use  the  b.b.  map  of  Europe, 
should  the  children  be  sufficiently  advanced  in  geography. 
It  would  greatly  interest  the  children  to  see  a  picture  of 
the  people  of  that  part  knitting  and  doing  many  other 
things  whilst  on  stilts.  The  geography  lesson  might  illus- 


128 


On  the  Teaching 


trate  this,  and  the  children  could  be  encouraged  to  make 
tiny  model  stilts  at  home. 


Study  39. 

f  + 1  are  taken  as  final  sounds. 
Symbols : 

1-  g 

2.  i 

3.  f 

4.  t 
See  p.  80. 

When  the  first  four  words  have  been  gained,  the  story 
introduces : — d  rift 
thrift 
swift. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  Philip,  into. 
H.  +  S.,  happen. 

Suggestions. — The  rill  will  revive  the  associations  of 
Study  29,  when  Lily  got  a  chill. 

If  the  children  had  the  sand-modelling  suggested  pre- 
vious to  Study  29  (see  p.  118),  they  would  enjoy  revising 
that  lesson,  and,  having  modelled  a  river,  it  would  be  a 
great  pleasure  to  them  to  put  in  a  lock.  They  would  pro- 
bably suggest  the  use  of  small  pieces  of  cardboard  or  stiff 
paper  for  this  purpose.  The  use  of  a  lock  might  be  gained 
from  them. 

The  mill  would  make  a  charming  picture  for  the  chil- 
dren to  draw,  and  a  delightful  subject  for  a  Kindergarten 
song. 


of  English  Reading  129 

Study  40. 

S  + 1  are  taken  as  final  sounds.  Reference  to  the 
Tabulating  Frame  leads  to  comparison  with  n  + 1  (Study 
3 6)  and  I +t  (Study  38). 

Symbols : 

1.  m 

2.  i 

3.  s 

4.  t 

(See  p.  80.) 

When  the  first  three  words  have  been  built,  the  children 
are  asked  to  suggest  other  words  to  join  this  party  and  they 
will  probably  give  t  W  i  S  t  and  W  r  i  S  t.  The  latter  will 
interest  them,  as  it  will  call  into  use  a  yellow  letter  (see 
Plate  11)  and  will  necessitate  friendliness  on  the  part  of 
the  eye. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  Philip,   Vulc*an,  sign*al. 

(*See  p.  29.) 
H.  +  S.,  cannot,  trotting. 
Capital :  V  cf.  v. 

We  have  a  new  friend  in  Vulcan,  Philip's  black  cob,  a 
very  fiery  steed. 

Suggestions. — If  the  reading  of  the  text  could  be  pre- 
ceded by  a  lesson  on  a  volcano,  it  would  lead  the  children 
to  the  appreciation  of  the  name  of  Philip's  cob. 

A  talk  about  mist  would  also  interest  them  very  much. 

Study   41. 

This  Study  is  a  very  important  one  and  we  shall  find 
it  advisable  to  devote  two  or  three  lessons  to  it. 

I 


130  On  the  Teaching 

If  the  children  follow  the  history  of  the  language,  they 
will  be  greatly  helped  in  the  spelling  of  the  words  4-  6  d. 

1.  The  first  word  pack  can  be  handled  as  suggested 
in  section  1  of  p.  116. 

2.  For  section  2,  the  word  packed   is  introduced 
in  a  story  and  the  children  discover  the  sounds  that  it 
contains. 

3.  The  final  sound  that  they  utter  =  t. 

4.  This  will  lead  them  to  expect  the  last  sign  to  be 
Uue. 

5.  They  are  told  that  in  the  olden  days  it  was  pro- 
nounced p  a  C  k  •  6  d.     They  like  to  build  this  word  in  the 
Frame,  using  a  black  d  ;  they  then  step  it,  letting  it  take 
two  steps. 

6.  They  compare    this   more    stately  way  of  talking 
(pack-ed)    with    its    present    hurried    pronunciation 
(packed).      They  consider   that  the  last   sign  of  the 
latter  should  be  blue  (cf.  section  3  above). 

7.  The  teacher  then  lets  Mary  put  a  blue  d  in  the 
place  of  the  black  d.     (A  blue  d,  at  the  back  of  black  d, 
will  be  found  in  the  box  of  Symbols.) 

8.  The  children  step  the  word   packed,  taking  one 
step  only.     (The  e  is  drawn  in  the  air.) 

9.  They  print  the  word  in  colour  on  their  b.b.  below 
pack  (cf.  p.    116,  section  3,  and   see   Plate    7).     The 
teacher  also  "  records  "  it. 

The  remaining  words  are  handled  as  suggested  above, 
but  when  banged  and  filled  are  introduced  (see 
section  2),  the  children  discover  that  the  final  sound  is  d 
(dog)  and  must  therefore  be  black, 


of  English  Reading  131 

In  building  these  two  words,  they  will  not  wish  to 
reverse  black  d  (see  section  7). 

Experience  will  show  them  that  the  d  is  bhie  when 
the  word  to  which  6  d  is  added  ends  in  a  "  sister " 
consonant  and  vice  versa.  (See  Plate  7.) 

This  leads  to  the  question,  "  How  was  it  that  the  words 
of  Study  37  took  two  steps  ?"  The  children  are  asked  to 
solve  this  problem,  and  if  the  solution  is  not  forthcoming, 
they  are  requested  to  think  the  matter  over. 

(They  will  probably  find  by  experiment  that  it  is  impos- 
sible to  pronounce  the  final  d  of  the  words  of  Study  37 
without  separating  it  from  the  preceding  dental  by  means 
of  a  vowel  sound,  thus  causing  the  word  to  take  two  steps). 

mix        1  leads    to     comparison    with     tax,    taxing. 

mixed/  (See  p.  117.) 

The  text  revives  the  associations  of  Studies  38,  35,  32,  5, 
23. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  himself,  wanted,  visit. 

H.  +  8.,  kitchen,  pudding,  polish*ed. 
(*Seep.  29.) 

Study  42. 

The  Study  heading  this  page  brings  into  use  m  i  n  C  6 
C  with  her  red  friend  e  sitting  next  to  her.  (See  p.  69.) 

Note. — If  "  Cecil "  is  introduced  in  a  story,  the  children 
will  enjoy  building  this  name  in  the  Frame,  and  they  will 
then  discover  that  c  has  another  friend,  i.  This  will  give 
especial  pleasure,  should  a  Cecil  be  present. 

For  c  +  6  or  i,  cf.  notes  on  g  (ma#ic),  p.  123. 


132  On  the  Teaching 


4.  The    mince   c 

and    6  are   taken 
down  by  one  child. 


Symbols  : 

1.  m 

2.  i 

3.  n 

4.  ce 

See  Note  on  p.  80. 

Note. — The  habit  of  pointing  to  the  final  e,  when 
revising  the  m  i  n  C  e  C  (see  "Further  Notes,"  p.  90), 
will  help  the  children  in  the  words  of  this  group. 

See  Note  on  p.  69. 

Words  for  Stepping. — H.,  Scotland,  pantry,  finishing, 

at*oms.     (*  See  p.  29.) 
H.  +  S.,  wicked,  puppy,  kitchen. 

The  text  introduces  us  to  "  Prince,"  Philip's  collie 
puppy,  which  has  recently  come  from  Scotland.  This 
suggests  an  imaginary  journey  to  his  early  home  and  a 
talk  of  his  route  to  the  south.  (On  the  points  of  the 
compass,  see  p.  124.) 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  quince  tree,  and 
drawings  from  the  children  of  the  tree  and  of  pots  of 
quince  jam,  the  word  quince  being  printed  in  colour 
on  the  outside  of  the  pot. 

Study  43. 

n  +  C  h  are  taken  as  final  sounds.     (See  p.  73.) 
Symbols : 

1.  i 

2.  n 

3.  ch}    3.  Taken  from  beneath  s  h. 
See  Note  on  p.  80. 


of  English  Reading  133 

The  children  are  accustomed  to  the  companionship  of 
n  and  c  h.  Cf.  Note  on  p.  13 2, and  see  "Further  Notes," 
p.  90. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  singing. 

H.  +  S.,  chaffinch,  bloss*om  (*see  p.  29). 

Frank,  the  garden  boy,  is  an  old  friend.  (See  Study  1 7.) 

The  children  will  probably  enjoy  reviving  the  associa- 
tions about  him. 

We  now  find  that  in  his  daily  work  in  the  garden  he 
has  met  with  a  chaffinch  which  has  built  its  nest  in  the 
fork  of  an  apple-tree.  Frank  takes  the  keenest  interest  in 
it,  and  will  jealously  guard  the  nest.  He  and  the  chaffinch 
have  become  great  friends. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  chaffinch  and  its 
nest.  Painting  of  apple-blossom. 

Study  44. 

t  C  h,  the  fully-expressed  "  sneezing  sister,"  is  taken  as 
the  final  sound.     (See  p.  96.) 
Symbols  : 

1.  p 

2.  i 

3.  tch 
See  Note  on  p.  80. 

On  the  use  of  the  dots  in  the  text,  see  "  Further  Notes," 
p.  121. 

On  the  word  suggested  for  writing,  see  pp.  145  and 
142  of  "  Further  Notes." 


134  On  the  Teaching 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  giv*en,  body,  wanted. 

H.  +  S.,  Betty,  Comm*on,  hemming, 

Granny,  stitches,  quickly,  telling,  unhappy,  wicked,  shock- 
ing, muddy. 

Capital :  G  cf.  g. 

The  text  introduces  us  to  Betty,  the  youngest  of  the 
seven  children.  She  is  a  very  sweet  little  woman,  and  a 
great  pet  of  the  family.  Granny  is  mentioned,  and  will 
come  to  visit  them  later  on.  (See  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  131.) 

Suggestions. — If  the  story  of  the  "  Frog  Prince " 
could  have  been  given  some  days  previous  to  the  reading 
of  Study  44,  it  would  enable  the  children  to  enter  more 
fully  into  Nan  and  Lily's  delight  in  hearing  it  from  Betty. 

Lesson  on  tar,  leading  up  to  pitch.  Children  who  have 
had  Greek  stories  told  them  will  remember  the  coating  of 
the  Argo  with  pitch. 

Study  45. 

The  children  are   familiar  with  j  (/ump)  and  with  g 
(magic).     They  are  now  going  to  be  introduced  to  a  digraph 
which  has  the  same  sounds  as  these. 
d  g  (bridge). 

A  story  is  told  about  Dobbin  who  did  not  wish  to 
cross  the  bridge  (see  picture  heading  Study  45,  and  Note 
on  p.  4). 

The  lesson  proceeds  as  on  pp.  37-40. 

d  g  is  shown  and  a  description  gained  (see  section  7). 

The  digraph  is  then  printed  by  the  children. 

Its  home  in  the  Frame  is  discussed,  and  it  is  placed  by 


of  English  Reading  135 

one  of  the  children  between  its  two  brothers  (see  Plate  1). 
d  g  +  6  are  then  used  for  building. 
Symbols : 


3.  The  digraph  d  g  and 
6  are  taken  down  by 
one  child. 


1.  m 

2.  i 

3.  dge 

See  Note  on  p.  80. 

Note. — The  children  draw  the  final  e  in  the  air  when 
they  sound  or  step  the  words  of  this  group. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.  +  S.,  trotting,  suddenly. 

bitt^en,  lucky. 

The  children  will  remember  that  Philip  came  to  grief 
when  riding  his  own  frisky  cob,  Vulcan.  (Study  40.)  He 
is  now  mounted  on  Dan's  nag,  Dobbin,  a  very  steady  char- 
acter. The  sagacity  of  the  latter  in  refusing  to  step  on  to 
a  bridge  which  appeared  safe,  though  on  the  verge  of  fall- 
ing, will  endear  him  to  the  children.  They  will  be  glad 
that  Philip  treated  him  so  kindly,  when  he  was  puzzled 
by  his  reluctance  to  go  on. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  gnats. 

The  word  ridge  suggests  sand-modelling  of  moun- 
tains and  hills,  and  this  will  recall  the  lesson  on  rivers  and 
streams  which  preceded  Study  29. 

The  much-loved  setting  sun  will  recall  the  events  of 
Study  34  and  the  lesson  on  the  points  of  the  compass. 

Study   46. 

This  Study  introduces  us  to  u  as  in  pwll. 

The  final  I  I   appearing  twice,  though  heard  once  only, 


136  On  the  Teaching 

leads  to  comparison  with  shall  (Study  10)  and  with  the 
two  Studies  of  words  ending  in  I  I.  (Studies  29  and  30.) 

The  need  of  friendliness  on  the  part  of  the  eye  is  again 
noticed. 

Symbols : 

1.  p 

2.  U 
3. 


1  3.  See  p.  55. 


Words  for  stepping. — H.,  helping,  content. 

H.  +  S.y  padd^ock,  boxes,  quickly, 

fixing. 

Jim,  an  old  friend  (see  Study  25),  comes  to  the  rescue 
of  Nan  and  Lily. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  shells,  for  the  illus- 
tration of  which  the  children  will  be  charmed  to  bring 
collections  they  may  have  made.  Modelling  of  shells. 

Drawings  of  the  bull. 

Study   47. 

The  Study  heading  this  page  contains  various  words  in 
which  U  has  the  sound  heard  in  pull. 

See  Note  on  p.  80.     The  children  are  told  that 
S  appears  twice  in  puss,  pussy, 
d        „  „       pudding. 

PUSS  leads  to  comparison  with  pull  and  f  i  I  I. 
(Studies  46,  29,  30.) 

The  children  add  y,  gaining  p  U  S  S  y. 

push  and  b  U  S  h  show  the  sister  p  and  brother  b 
each  making  a  word. 


of  English  Reading  137 

For  the  stepping  of  the  word  p  U  d  d  i  n  g,  see  "  Further 
Notes,"  p.  127  («). 

The  word  d  i  f  f  I  C  U  It,  which  appears  in  the  text, 
gives  an  example  of  a  weakened  vowel  sound  (u).  (See 
p.  29.)  It  must  not  be  forgotten  by  the  eye,  though  the 
ear  may  be  little  conscious  of  it.  The  feet  must  also 
remember  it,  giving  the  third  step  to  the  word. 

Words  for  Stepping. — H.,  wanted,  bringing,  gladly. 
E.  +  S.,  Phyllis,  bonnet,  difficult, 
quickly,  pudding,  pussy. 

The  text  introduces  us  to  Betty's  favourite  cousin, 
Phyllis,  who  is  six  years  old.  Her  name  will  suggest  an 
imaginary  journey  to  Greece.  The  tailed  y  in  the  early 
part  of  the  word  will  excite  remark,  and  the  children  will 
be  interested  to  hear  that  this  often  points  to  the  home  of 
such  a  word  being  Greece.  They  can  go  on  voyages  of 
discovery  in  search  of  other  such  words  in  books  they  may 
be  reading  at  a  later  date. 

The  pink  dress  belongs  to  the  dolly  bought  by  Dan  for 
Lily.  (Study  34.) 

Jack  comes  to  the  rescue  of  his  beloved  cat.  (See 
Study  10.) 

The  vowels 

i        u 
a 

of  the  Vowel  Table  (see  Plate    2)   have  now   been  used 
exhaustively  for  building  purposes. 


ON  THE  INFANT  READER. 

THE  Infant  Eeader  introduces  groups  of  words  containing 
U  as  in  muff,  e  as  in  egg,  and  O  as  in  top.  (See  Note  on 
p.  58  of  "Further  Notes.") 

On  the  words  and  capital  letters  suggested  for  Writing 
in  connection  with  the  Infant  Reader,  see  "  Further  Notes," 
pp.  146-150. 

On  Dictation,  see  "Further  Notes,"  pp.  159,  160. 

For  the  Supplementary  Chapters  bearing  on  the  Infant 
Reader,  see  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  60. 

Study  48. 

As  the  children  have  had  so  much  practice  in  building, 
they  will  now  have  two  studies  on  one  page,  unless  the 
words  are  too  numerous  to  allow  of  this. 

Study  48  has  p  as  final  consonant,  and  its  brother  b. 

The  method  employed  in  building  is  similar  to  thai  used 
in  previous  Studies  (seep.  80),  and  consequently  there  is  no 
need  for  extensive  notes. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  present,  frolic,  ended. 

H.  +  8.,  puppy,  scrubbing. 
Lily's  puppy  "  Smut "  is  a  pug  dog. 

Suggestions. — Lesson  on  bear  and  cubs.  A  chat  about 
grubs  in  connection  with  wasps.  (See  Study  18.) 

188 


On  the  Teaching  of  English  Reading    139 

Study  49. 

t  and  its  brother  d  are  used  as  final  sounds. 
Words  for  stepping. — H.,  *astonish. 

H.  +  8.,  picking,  rigging. 
Suggestion. — Nature  Lesson  on  various  kinds  of  nuts. 

Study  50. 
0  k     (See  p.  48.) 
Words  for  stepping. — H.,  given,    madly,    *astonish- 

m*ent,  simply. 

H.  +  S,,  Betty,  sitting,  ducklings, 
distress. 

Suggestions, — Nature  Lesson  on  a  duck  and  ducklings 
(cf,  with  hen,  see  Study  32).  The  text  would  lend  itself 
to  a  delightful  Kindergarten  song.  The  children  might 
suggest  the  words  and  a  tune  could  be  adapted  to  them. 

Drawings  of  the  truck  in  which  the  hen  sat  might  be 
made  by  the  children. 

Study  51. 

Words  for  stepping.— H.  +  S.,  Betty,  hugging,  kennel. 
Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  slugs  and  snails. 

Study  52. 

Words  for  stepping.— IT.,  finishing. 
H%  +  S.,  running. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  plum-tree  and  gum. 
History  of  a  pot  of  plum  jam. 


140  On  the  Teaching 

Study  53. 
Words  for  stepping. — fl.,  Philip,  wanted. 

H.  +  S.,  padd*ock,  muddy. 

Study  54. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  trumpet,  tramping,  *along, 

ambush. 

H.  +  S.,  pocket. 
Suggestion. — Cf.  sounds  of  different  instruments. 

Study  55. 

All  the  monosyllables  of  this  Study  are  old  friends  and 
can  therefore  be  printed  by  the  children  on  their  b.b.  or 
slates  from  dictation. 

1.  A  sentence  is  given  containing  the  word  nap.     The 
children  are  asked  to  print  nap  in  colours  on  their  b.b.  or 
slates. 

Stage  1.  nap 

It  is  also  printed  on  the  special  b.b.  and  built  in  the 
Frame. 

They  are  then  asked  how  many  signs  follow  the  red 
friend  a. 

2.  The   story  is   continued   and    introduces  the   word 
napping. 

All  say  napping  in  chorus,  and  discover  the  sounds. 

3.  I  then  ask  them  to  watch  carefully  whilst  I  print 
that  word  below  nap  (see  Stage  1),  so  that  they  may  dis- 
cover the  secret  I  am  hoping  they  may  find  out. 

In  Stage  1  n  a  p  was  seen. 

In  Stage  2  napping  is  seen.      (See  Plate  8.) 


of  English  Reading  141 

4.  The  children  quickly  notice  that  a  second  p  joins 
hands  with  her  "  sister  "  to  help  her  to  bear  the  weight  of 

ing. 

They  add  p  and  i  n  g  to  the  word  nap  which  is 
already  in  the  Frame. 

They  then  sound  and  step  napping.  Though 
p  is  seen  twice,  it  is  sounded  once  only,  the  second  p  being 
drawn  in  the  air.  Cf.  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  127  (e). 

5.  The  children  are  now  asked  to  print  napping  under 
nap  on  their  b.b.  or  slates,  taking  great  care  to  arrange  the 
three  first  symbols  exactly  under  each   other  so  that  the 
complete  growth  of  the  word  may  be  seen,  standing  out 
beyond  the  original  form.     (See  section  3  above.) 

For  the  remaining  words  of  this  Study,  the  lesson 
proceeds  as  suggested  above,  but  the  children  may  wish  to 
do  the  teacher's  work  (see  section  3),  or  they  may  wish  to 
make  the  additions  of  section  4,  before  the  second  word 
(see  section  3)  is  printed  on  the  b.b. 

They  may  suggest  comparison  with  Study  28,  and 
reference  to  the  words  of  that  Study  will  show  them  that 
a  (bat)  was  then  followed  by  two  or  more  letters  before 
ing  was  added. 

Words    for    stepping. — H.  +  S.,   napping,   chatting, 

skipping,  digging,  swimming. 

Study  56. 

f  f  is  taken  as  the  final  sound.     (See  Note  on  p.  80.) 
For  the  word  sixpence,  cf.  Study  42,  p.  131. 


142  On  the  Teaching 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  intends,  sultry,  Mad*am,  Paris. 

H.  +  S.,  sixp*ence,  Dolly. 

The  word  Thanks  in  the  text  of  Study  56  of  the  Infant 

Header  gives  an  example  of  the  digraph  blue  T  h.     (See 

Plate  3.) 

Capital :  t  T  h  (blue)  cf.  t  h  (blue). 

Suggestion. — A  lesson  on  sixpence. 

Study  57. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  jumping,  splendid,  study, 

resting. 

H.  +  S.,  jacket,  Molly,  running. 
Molly,  one  of  the  maids,  appears  in  the  text  for  the 
first  time. 

Suggestion. — A  lesson  on  a  thrush. 

Study  58. 

Words   for   stepping.  —  H.  +  S.,   bott*om,   mistress, 

kenn*el. 

Study  59. 

C  h  (the  "sneezing  sister")  and  g  +  e  (see  p.  122)  are 
taken  as  final  sounds.     (See  Note  on  p.  80.) 
distance  (see  p.  131). 

Words  for  stepping. — R.,  splendidly,  sandy. 

H.  +  S.,  Daddy,  swimming,  dist*ance 

t  See  Note  on  p.  30. 


of  English  Reading  143 

Study  60. 
m  +  p  (see  pp.  100  and  125). 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  badly,  dumplings. 
H.  +  S.,  gritty,  syrup. 

Suggestion. — A  lesson  on   sugar  in   connection   with 
syrup. 

Study  61. 
n  +  t  (see  p.  125). 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  punting. 

H.  +  S.,  Teddingt*on,     drumming, 
pocket. 

Suggestions. — Lesson  on  a  pig.     (See  Study  24.) 
Drawings  of  a  punt  and  of  the  pigs  on  the  bank. 

Study  62. 
n  +  C  h,  cf.  Study  43,  p.  132.     See  Note,  p.  80. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  intends,  children,  jumping. 

H.  +  S.,  running,  padd*ock,  mutt*on. 
A  new  friend  appears  in  "  Punch,"  Pat's  dog.     For  the 
allusion  to  the  frogs  see  text  of  Study  53. 
See  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  80. 

Study  63. 
S  +  t  (see  p.  129). 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  *afresh,  rushes. 

H.  +  S.,  Molly,  bott*om,  gully. 


144  On  the  Teaching 

The  children  are  again  at  the  sea-side,  cf.  Study  19. 

Suggestions. — Models  and  drawings  of  a  gully.  A 
chat  about  wind. 

Study  61 

tch      \Cf.  pp.  96,  134. 

d  g  +  6  j See  Notes,  pp.  80  and  135. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  wanted,  finishing. 

H.  +  S.,  Holl*and,  Dutchm*an,  chickens, 

rabbit,  hutches,  windmill. 
The    two    elder    boys   of    the   family   now  journey  to 
Holland. 

The  children  might  journey  with  them  in  imagination. 

Suggestions. — A  talk  about  Holland  and  about  the 
habits  of  the  Dutch. 

A  lesson  on  rabbits.     Drawings  of  a  windmill. 

Study  65. 

This  Study  is  taken  in  a  similar  manner  to  Study  55 
(see  sections  1,  2,  3,  4,  5),  6  d  being  added  instead  of  i  n  g. 

The  children  will  notice  that  the  single  consonant  follow- 
ing a  (bat)  is  doubled  before  e  d  as  it  was  before  i  n  g. 
(See  Plate  9.)  See  "  Further  Notes,"  172  (/). 

Study  66. 

The  vowel  sound  e  (egg)  is  used  in  the  studies  taken 
next.     It  is  taken  down  from  its  place  between  a  and  i. 
Words  for  stepping. — H.,  singing. 
H.  +  S.,  happy. 


of  English  Reading  145 

Suggestions. — A  lesson  on  hemp,  which  might  be 
grown  in  the  class-room.  Eevision  of  the  lesson  on  a 
thrush  (see  Study  51?).  See  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  62. 

The  hopping  of  the  thrush  suggests  a  talk  about  other 
birds  which  hop  (cf.  with  those  which  walk). 

Note. — y  in  y  e  t.  As  the  transition  from  the  semi- 
vocalic  j  to  its  pronunciation  as  a  continuant  is  almost 
imperceptible,  y  is  treated  as  a  vowel  in  yet  and  similar 
words. 

Study  67. 

The  word  wedding  leads  to  comparison  with  words  of 
Study  55.  For  Vulcan,  see  p.  129. 

Words  for  stepping. — ff.,  velvet,  Vulc*an. 

H.  +  S.,  wedding,  trotted,  brack*en. 
The  children  will  be  interested  in  the  marriage  of  their 
old  friend  Fanny. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  bracken. 

In  the  Geography  lesson  a  journey  might  be  taken  to 
the  Lake  District  or  to  other  districts  where  the  bracken 
is  mown  and  used  instead  of  straw.  (Cf.  p.  62,  lines  14-18.) 

Study  68. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  *along,  twisted. 

H.  +  S.,   pulling,  swimming,  peck- 
ing, dragging. 

Suggestions.— Lesson  on  a  swan.  History  of  a  piece 
of  string. 

K 


146  On  the  Teaching 

Study  69. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.t  intends,  finish. 

H.  +  S.,  napping,  hass*ock. 

For  Betty's  black  hen  see  Study  50. 
Ben  is  mentioned  for  the  first  time.     He  is  a  general 
factotum. 

Suggestions. — Lesson  on  a  fen.     Cf.  Holland.     (See 
Study  64.) 

Study  70. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  Emily. 

H.  +  S.,  hollyhocks,  jelly. 
Capital :  E  '•/.  e. 

Emily  is  the  maid  who  came  in  Fanny's  place.     (See 
Study  67.) 

Suggestions. — Nature    Lesson    on    hollyhocks.      For 
shells,  cf.  Study  46.     See  "  Further  Notes,"  pp.  62,  63. 

Study  71. 

Blue  S  S  finally,  cf.  Studies  29,  30,  46,  56,  70.     See 
General  Remarks,  "Further  Notes,"  p.  101. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  visit. 

H.  +  S.,  digging,  sitting,  cutting. 

Bess  and  Jess  are  two  little  friends  of  the  children  of 
our  family. 

Suggestions. — Lesson  on  cress,  which  might  be  grown 
in  the  class-room. 


of  English  Reading  147 

Study  72. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  robin,  gently,  plenty,  think- 
ing, intends,  handful. 
H.  +  S.,  getting,   watching,    fledge- 
lings. 

The  word  handful  may  excite  remark.  The  children 
may  discover  that  in  a  word  which  takes  more  than  one 
step  full  drops  1.  Fledgeling  suggests  the  gaining  of  other 
words  with  the  diminutive  "  ling."  (See  Studies  50  and  60.) 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  wild  duck,  and  on  a 
robin.  A  talk  about  vetches.  See  "  Further  Notes,"  p.  107. 

Study  73. 

The  two  studies  on  this  page  will  interest  the  children, 
as  they  will  discover  that  many  of  the  words  of  the  second 
half  of  the  study  are  the  present  form  of  those  in  the  first. 
Cf.          bent,  bend. 

The  usual  mode  of  progression  is  unchanged,  as  the 
sister  sound  is  always  taken  as  a  final  before  its  brother. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  visit,  giv*en,  candy,  send- 
ing, wishes,  present. 
H.  +  S.,   Phyllis,   Granny,    shilling, 
sixp*ence,   packet,    sun- 
bonnet. 

Suggestions. — The  visit  of  Phyllis  and  Betty  to  Kent 
suggests  a  Geography  lesson,  in  which  the  children  might 
model  the  county  and  imagine  the  cherry-trees  and  hops 
growing  in  it. 


148  On  the  Teaching 

Study  74. 

Cf.  Study  62.     See  Note  on  p.  80. 
Words  for  stepping. — H.  +  S.,  catching,  getting,  foggy. 
Capitals :  U  cf.  u 

O  cf.  O 

Suggestions, — Nature  Lesson  on  a  tench. 
A  talk  about  fog  (cf.  Study  40).     Modelling  of  a  trench 
in  sand-trays. 

Study  76. 
Words   for    stepping. — H.,  abs*ent,  pres*ently,  lifted, 

gently. 

H.  +  S.,  sun-bonnet,   mistress,  ill- 
ness, hass*ock. 

Suggestion, — A  talk  about  wax. 

Study  76. 
Words  for  stepping. — H.,  crested. 

H.  +  S,,  flitted,  expanded. 

Betty  comes  home,  bringing  her  little  cousin  Phyllis 
with  her. 

Suggestion. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  wren. 

Study  77. 

This  study  is  taken  in  a  similar  manner  to  Study  55 
(see  sections,  1,  2,  3,  4,  5),  e  d  being  added  instead  of 
ing.  The  doubling  of  the  consonant  before  e  d  leads  to 
comparison  with  Study  65.  On  blue  d  and  black  d,  see 
notes  on  page  130.  On  the  stepping  of  the  syllables,  see 
also  page  130.  For  the  colours,  see  Plate  10. 


of  English  Reading  149 

Study  78. 

The  vowel  sound  O  (top)  is  used  in  the  studies  next 
built. 

Words  for   stepping-. — H.,   mended,    washing,    badly, 

bending. 
H.  +  S.,  unless,  bucket. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  an  elm-tree. 
Miniature  mop  made  by  the  children. 

Study  79. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  finish,  mending,  study,  It*aly. 
H.  +  S.,  shocking,  finish*ed. 

Suggestions. — Daddy's  visit  to  Italy  suggests  the  model- 
ling of  that  country  in  sand-trays.  If  the  children  have  learnt 
"  peninsula  "  as  one  of  their  geographical  definitions,  they  will 
quickly  recognise  what  a  good  illustration  they  have  of  this. 

Study  80. 
Words  for  stepping. — H.,  parish,  fishing. 

H.  +  S.,  Dobbin,  blacksmith. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  peas  (cf.  vetch, 
Study  72). 

The  last  sentence  suggests  a  talk  about  fresh  and  salt 
water  fish. 

Study  81. 
Words  for  stepping. — H.,  helping. 

H.  +  S.,  quickly,  watches. 

Jim,  who  looks  after  the  animals  on  the  home-farm,  is 


150  On  the  Teaching 

now  going  to  wash  the  sheep.  Jock,  the  sheep-dog,  will 
help  him  and  will  quickly  reduce  disorderly  sheep  to 
order. 

Suggestions. — Lesson  on  sheep.  Stories  about  sheep- 
dogs. 

Study  82. 

Words  for  stepping. — H.,  Mildred,  Winifred,  Grumpy, 
Frisky,  Sulky,  sadly,  thinking,  punishment,  tremblingly, 
bulrushes. 

H.  +  S.,  mossy,  distressing,  telling,  jelly,  fitting,  Ma/esty 
(jump  j,  see  Note,  p.  25),  hidd*en. 

Mildred  and  Winifred  are  two  little  neighbours  of  our 
family.  They  had  been  studying  the  life-history  of  a  frog, 
and  are  discussing  the  subject.  Dire  consequences  might 
have  followed  but  for  the  friendly  intervention  of  the  duck. 

Suggestions. — Lesson  on  a  bog  and  a  model  of  one 
with  bog  plants.  See  "Further  Notes,"  p.  133,  lines 
13-15. 

Study  83. 
Words  for  stepping. — H.,  practising. 

H.  +  S.,  singing,  wrongly  (see  p.  26). 

Suggestions. — A  journey  to  the  East  (cf.  Suggestions, 
p.  124)  to  the  home  of  the  gong  (see  Note,  p.  10). 

Study  84. 
Words  ending  in  blue  S  S  cf.  Study  71. 

,,  „  blue  X  cf.  Studies  12  and  32. 

t  C  h  cf.       „        13,  44,  64,  72. 
„  „  dg  +  ec/.       „       45,64,72. 


of  English  Reading  151 

Words  for  stepping.  —  H.,  wanted,  picnic,  candy, 
children,  sev*en,  intending,  bushes,  helping,  cavity. 

ff.  +  S.,  help*ed,  shaggy,  ox*en,  finish*ed,  knitted, 
chatted,  running,  cunning,  hidd*en,  lodges,  napping. 

The  children  of  our  family  take  Granny  for  a  picnic. 

Suggestions. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  bat.  Drawings  of 
a  fox  and  of  the  Scotch  oxen. 

Study  85. 

This  study  is  taken  in  a  similar  manner  to  Study  41, 
d  (black)  being  added  instead  of  e  d,  cf.  Study  37.  See 
Note  on  p.  80. 

The  text  revives  the  associations  of  Studies  64  and  72. 

Words  for  stepping. — ff.  +  S.,  windmill,  nestlings. 
(See  note  on  fledgelings,  Study  72.) 

Study  86. 

The  children  will  have  met  several  words  containing 
silent  consonants  (see  Plate  11,  and  p.  58). 

This  study  contains  most  of  the  useful  words  (with 
short  vowel  sounds)  in  which  m  is  followed  by  silent  b. 
This  silent  b  is  clad  in  yellow. 

Symbols : 

}  3.  The   two    symbols    are 
(      taken  down  by  one  child. 

3.  m  b) 

See  Note  on  p.  80. 

The  children  draw  b  in  the  air  when  they  sound  or 
step  the  words  of  this  group. 


152    On  the  Teaching  of  English  Reading 

Words     for     stepping.  —  H.,     evid*ently,     longing, 
trembling,  consented,  gladly,  pantry. 
H.  +  S.,  chilly,  putting,  trotted,  Molly,  kitchen,  happy. 

Suggestion. — Nature  Lesson  on  a  lamb. 

The  children  now  pass  on  to  Book  I.  of  "The  Dale 
Readers,"  which  is  published  by  Messrs  George  Philip  & 
Son,  Limited,  32  Fleet  Street,  London. 

A  Running  Commentary  on  Book  I.  will  be  found  in 
"  Further  Notes  on  the  Teaching  of  English  Reading " 
(G.  Philip  &  Son). 


SOME  REMARKS  ON  THE  PRODUCTION  OF 
ENGLISH  SPEECH  SOUNDS. 

BY  WALTEK  RIPPMANN,  M.A. 


THE  CONSONANTS. 

Stops. 

Lip  Stops  or  Labials. 
p :  £>at,  t&p. 

The  breath  passes  unimpeded  through  the  throat  and 
mouth  until  it  is  stopped  by  the  lips  being  pressed  together. 
The  sound  of  p  is  produced  by  its  bursting  through  this 
obstacle. 

b  :  Jat,  ta&. 

The  breath,  as  it  passes  through  the  throat;  sets  the 
vocal  chords  *  vibrating,  and  after  that  acts  as  in  the  case 
of  p. 

*The  vocal  chords  are  two  horizontal  membranes  attached  to 
movable  cartilages  in  the  throat.  In  certain  positions  they  are  made 
to  vibrate  by  the  breath  as  it  is  pressed  up  from  the  lungs,  and  the 
result  is  the  sound  known  as  voice. 

The  vibration  is  naturally  short  in  the  case  of  stops ;  it  is  most 
easily  noticed  in  the  production  of  continuants.  The  distinction 
between  prolonged  /  and  v,  or  s  and  z  is  very  marked,  especially  if  the 
hands  are  held  to  the  ears,  or  if  the  hand  is  pressed  on  the  top  of  the 
head,  or  if  a  finger  is  placed  on  the  windpipe. 

153 


154  On  the  Teaching 

Note. — p  and  b  are  both  stops  (or  explosives,  so  called  on 
account  of  the  little  explosion  caused  by  the  air  bursting 
through  the  obstacle) ;  p,  however,  is  produced  without 
vibration  of  the  vocal  chords  and  is  therefore  called  voiceless 
or  breathed  ;  b  is  voiced. 

Utter  the  stops  p  and  b  with  the  hand  close  to  the  lips  and  observe 
that  the  breath  is  emitted  with  greater  force  in  the  case  of  p,  as  none  of 
its  energy  has  been  spent  in  connection  with  the  vocal  chords. 


Point  Stops  or  Dentals. 

t:  tell,  let. 

The  production  of  t  is  similar  to  that  of  p,  but  the 
breath  is  stopped  earlier,  by  the  point  of  the  tongue 
touching  the  ridge  above  the  upper  teeth. 

d :  dell,  led, 

is  produced  exactly  as  t,  the  breath,  however,  previously 
setting  the  vocal  chords  in  motion. 

2fote. — t  and  d  are  therefore  also  stops,  t  being  the 
voiceless,  d  the  voiced  sound. 


Back  Stops  or  Gutturals. 

c,  k,  q :  call,  lock. 

In  the  case  of  c,  k,  as  a  rule  the  stoppage  is  effected  by 

the  middle  or  back  (back  in  q,  cp.  Note)  of  the  tongue  being 

pressed  against  the  palate. 

g:  gall,  log. 
The  production  of  this  sound  is  parallel  to  c,  k,  q,  the 


of  English  Reading  155 

breath,  however,  having  previously  set  the  vocal  chords  in 
motion. 

Note. — It  is  interesting  to  notice  that  the  stoppage  in  the  case  of 
c,  k,  and  g  is  not  always  in  exactly  the  same  place.  It  is  influenced 
by  neighbouring  sounds  ;  thus,  it  is  more  forward  in  the  mouth  in  the 
case  of  &een  or  begin  than  in  the  case  of  cool  or  good.  As  q  is  as  a  rule 
followed  by  the  sound  w,  it  is  generally  pronounced  in  the  same  place. 
These  considerations  explain  the  change  suffered  by  c  and  g  when  they 
precede  e  or  i ;  these  vowels  required  the  raising  of  the  front  of  the 
tongue,  and  the  articulation  of  a  preceding  c  or  g  was  "  forward  "  in  the 
mouth.  Then  the  forward  stop  passed  into  a  continuant. 


Nasals.* 

The   distinguishing  feature  of    the  nasal   sounds  m,  n, 
ng,  is  that  the  breath  is  exhaled  through  the  nose. 

m:  murmur,  rum. 

The  stoppage  in  the  case  of  m  being  in  the  same  place 
as  for  p  and  b ; 

n :  nurture,  run, 
in  the  case  of  n  as  for  t  and  d ; 

ng:  rung, 
and  in  the  case  of  ng  as  for  k  and  g. 

Note. — That  part  of  the  breath  which  passes  through  the  nose  makes 
itself  distinctly  felt  if  the  thumb  is  held  lengthwise  across  the  upper 
lip  and  a  nasal  is  uttered.  Its  effects  can  be  seen  if  the  face  is  brought 
close  to  a  piece  of  cold  glass  (a  mirror  or  window-pane),  and  a  flat  ruler 
placed  with  one  edge  against  the  glass  and  the  other  against  the  upper 
lip.  If  a  nasal  is  then  littered,  the  glass  will  be  dimmed  above  the 
ruler. 

*  These  are  a  special  section  of  the  stops,  but  as  the  passage  through 
t/he  nose  is  open,  they  can  be  made  as  long  as  vowels  or  continuants, 


156  On  the  Teaching 

Liquids.* 

The  sounds  1  and  r  (both  voiced)  are  produced  by  the 
raising  of  the  front  of  the  tongue.  In  the  case  of  1  the 
breath  passes  at  the  sides  of  the  tongue. 

Note. — The  sound  r  requires  considerable  attention  on 
the  part  of  the  teacher,  and  every  mispronunciation  (e.g. 
vewy)  should  be  corrected  at  the  outset.  It  is  organically 
possible  for  every  child  to  produce  the  right  sound. 

The  final  r  in  southern  English  is  only  pronounced 
when  followed  by  a  word  which  begins  with  a  vowel.  This 
has  led  to  such  faulty  pronunciation  as  "  the  idear  of  it," 
which  it  is  the  duty  of  the  teacher  to  prevent  or  to  cure. 

Continuants. 

The  remaining  consonant  sounds  are  the  continuants 
proper.  Here  the  breath  is  not  stopped,  but  the  articula- 
tions are  brought  so  closely  together  that  a  sound  is  pro- 
duced by  the  breath  rubbing  against  them.t  The  breath 
is  not  stopped,  and  the  sound  may  be  prolonged  or  continued 
as  long  as  the  breath  of  one  exhalation  lasts. 

Lip  Continuants. 

when  (see  first  wh  on  Table  of  Consonants,  Plate  1). 

The  breath  rubs  against  the  lips  which  just  allow  it  to  pass  through. 
This  voiceless  wh  (sometimes  wrongly  explained  as  h  +  w)  is  rare  in 
southern  English,  except  in  emphatic  diction. 

were,  where  (see  second  wh,  Plate  1).  Same  as  the 
previous  sound,  but  with  vibration  of  vocal  chords.  In 
southern  English  this  is  the  current  pronunciation  of  wh. 

*  These  are  a  special  section  of  the  continuants. 

t  Hence  these  sounds  have  also  been  called  fricatives. 


of  English  Reading  157 

Lip-teeth  Continuants. 
f ,  ph :  /lie,  li/e ;  v  :  vile,  live. 

These  are  produced  by  pressing  the  lower  lip  against 
the  upper  teeth ;  the  breath  issues  between  the  teeth.  In 
the  case  of  v  there  is  also  vibration  of  the  vocal  chords. 

Point-teeth  Continuants. 

th  :  tf^ank,  th&n. 

The  point  of  the  tongue  is  placed  against  the  edges  of 
upper  teeth,  and  the  breath  passes  between  it  and  the  teeth. 
In  the  case  of  th  as  in  them,  there  is  also  vibration  of 
the  vocal  chords. 

Note. — It  will  be  noticed  that  there  is  similarity  in  the  mode  of 
production  of  th  (voiceless  and  voiced)  and  of  /  or  v,  as  in  both  cases 
the  friction  of  the  breath  is  past  the  upper  teeth  ;  there  is  consequently 
similarity  in  the  acoustic  effect.  This  explains  the  "/umb"  of  little 
children,  and  the  "  nujfink  "  and  "  muwer  "  of  modern  Cockney  speech. 

Point  Continuants. 

s,  c  :  sell,  cats,  hiss  ;  cell,     s,  z  :  rise,  dogs ;  zeal,  buzz, 
sh,  ch  :  shall,  lash ;  French,     s  :  pleasure. 

The  voiced  and  voiceless  s  sounds  are  formed  on  the 
gums  just  behind  the  teeth,  the  sh  sounds  being  a  little 
farther  back.  The  latter  are  produced  by  the  point  of  the 
tongue  and  the  part  immediately  behind  it  (the  "  blade "), 
for  which  reason  they  have  also  been  called  blade  continu- 
ants. The  sound  in  each  case  is  produced  by  the  breath 
rubbing  against  the  teeth ;  but  in  s  (voiceless)  and  z  (voiced) 
the  tongue  forms  a  little  channel,  and  the  breath  is  thereby 
directed  against  a  single  point,  while  in  the  sh  sounds  the 
breath  is  more  diffused. 


158 


On  the  Teaching 


Note. — These  explanations  will  make  it  easy  to  prevent 
which  is  only  a  habit,  and  can  in  almost  every  case  be  cured  without 
difficulty.  The  way  in  which  s  sounds  are  produced  should  first  be 
made  clear.  The  pupil  should  then  try  to  pronounce  a  correct  s.  If 
some  difficulty  is  experienced,  he  may  be  asked  to  hum  a  scale  on  the 
sound  sh,  beginning  with  a  low  note  ;  as  the  notes  become  higher,  the 
sh  will  be  found  to  approach  more  and  more  closely  to  s.  Once  the 
sound  is  obtained  and  recognised  by  the  ear,  all  that  is  required  is 
energy  on  the  part  of  the  learner.  At  the  beginning  of  words  s  will 
present  no  difficulty,  but  at  first  the  sound  will  be  hard  to  produce 
inside  the  word.  For  this  purpose  the  pupil  should  say,  for  instance, 
sting,  then  hoi-sting.  The  latter  word  is  then  repeated  more  and  more 
quickly  until  hoisting  is  correctly  pronounced.  A  lisper  cannot  be  ex- 
pected to  drop  the  habit  at  once  ;  it  is  well  at  first  to  get  him  to  read 
aloud  for  about  twenty  minutes  every  day,  taking  care  to  utter 
every  s  sound  correctly.  As  his  ear  will  tell  him  when  he  goes 
wrong,  he  can  do  this  perfectly  well  by  himself.  After  this,  he  may 
be  asked  to  avoid  lisping  in  common  words,  such  as  "yes,"  and  to 
do  so  at  first  only  in  the  morning  hours ;  then  he  will  soon  give  it 
up  altogether. 


The  Short  Vowels. 

The  short  vowels  in  English  may  be  arranged  in  the 
following  way: — 


front 
tongue 


broad  slit'         I     \    \        '  round 
'  highest   \  halfjioay!  \half-way  U  highest  ^ 
/     natural     \ 


half-uxiy     6 

sliyhtl. 


O    half-way 

slightly 
raised 


back 
tongue 


In  the  case  of  these  vowels,  the  breath,  after  setting  the 
vocal  chords  in  motion,  passes  through  the  mouth ;  it  does 


of  English  Reading  159 

not  meet  with  any  obstacle  to  check  it  altogether,  nor  does 
it  have  to  pass  between  articulations  so  close  as  to  cause 
rubbing*;  but  the  passages  through  which  it  passes  vary, 
according  to  the  position  of  the  tongue,  and  the  angle  at 
which  the  lower  jaw  is  to  the  upper.  At  the  same  time 
there  may  be  a  change  in  the  position  of  the  lips,  though  in 
good  southern  English  there  is  usually  very  little  lip  move- 
ment. In  saying  i  the  corners  of  the  lips  are  drawn  back, 
and  the  opening  resembles  a  broad  slit ;  in  passing  through 
e  to  a,  the  lips  approximate  gradually  to  their  natural  posi- 
tion (i.e.  when  we  breathe  through  the  mouth),  and  as  we 
pass  through  o  to  u  (pwt),  the  shape  of  the  lips  gradually 
approaches  a  circle.  This  is  very  marked  in  the  pronuncia- 
tion of  French  or  German. 

The  sound  of  u  in  "  but "  is  peculiar  to  English.  Here 
the  back  of  the  tongue  is  raised,  but  the  lips  are  never 
rounded.  It  is  very  like  a  short  '  continental '  a. 

Vowels  are  variously  classified : — front  or  back  vowels 
according  to  tongue  position ;  rounded  or  unrounded  vowels 
according  to  whether  the  lips  are  rounded  or  not ;  open  or 
close  vowels  (the  English  short  vowels  are  all  open,  but 
in  French  e'te',  fini  the  vowels  are  close) ;  and  according 
to  whether  all  the  breath  is  exhaled  through  the  mouth  or 
some  passes  through  the  nose,  they  are  called  oral  and 
nasal  vowels  (there  are  no  nasal  vowels  in  English,  but  in 
French  enfin  the  vowels  are  nasal). 

*  In  many  cases  vowels  have  gradually  passed  over  into  con- 
tinuants, through  a  lessening  of  the  space  between  the  articulations  :  it 
is  impossible  to  say  at  what  point  exactly  a  sound  ceases  to  be  a  vowel 
and  begins  to  be  a  continuant. 


160     On  the  Teaching  of  English  Reading 

h  :  hot. 

This  is  merely  breath  ;  we  produce  the  sound  when  we 
breathe  on  our  hands  in  winter  to  make  them  warm.  When 
we  blow  on  them  the  lips  are  closer  together,  and  the 
breath  is  directed  to  a  particular  spot. 

Note. — In  conversation  many  unaccented  words  (e.g. 
him,  her)  lose  their  initial  h,  even  in  educated  speech. 


Double  Sounds. 

Certain  features  of  English  spelling  call  for  remark  :  x 
has  two  values  ;  k  +  s  and  g  +  z,  as  in  exercise  and  ezert. 

Note. — When  x  is  preceded  by  the  principal  accent,  the 
sounds  are  pronounced  without  vibration  of  the  vocal  chords. 

nk,  nq,  represent  the  guttural  nasal  (represented  by  ng 
in  ting}  +  k. 

ng  as  in  fi^er  consists  of  the  nasal  sound  expressed  by 
ng  in  ling  +  g  as  in  ^et. 

ch  and  tch  represent  t  +  the  sound  usually  represented 
by  sh. 

g  (dg)  j  represent  the  corresponding  voiced  sounds,  viz., 
d  +  the  sound  represented  by  s  in  pleasure,  cp.  ledger  and 
leisure. 

Fuller  details  of  the  production  of  English,  as  well  as  of  French 
and  German,  speech  sounds  are  given  in  Elements  of  Phonetics: 
English,  French  and  German,  adapted  by  Walter  Rippmann,  from 
Professor  Victor's  Kleine  Phonetik,  and  published  by  Messrs  J.  M. 
Dent  &  Co. 


A  TALK  ABOUT  ENGLISH 


A  TALE   ABOUT   ENGLISH. 

BY  DR  H.  FRANK  HEATH. 

[How  much  of  Dr  Heath's  interesting  letter  should  "be  read 
(or  told)  to  the  children  in  the  early  stages  must  be  left  to 
the  discretion  of  the  teacher.  With  very  young  children  it 
may  be  thought  wiser  not  to  enter  into  the  historical  details. 
In  this  case  the  teacher  can  select  the  parts  which  will  appeal 
to  the  little  learners :  those  which  are  omitted  at  first  will  be 
a  pleasure  in  store.] 

My  dear  children,  I  feel  quite  sure  that  these  beautiful 
little  books  with  their  pictures  will  interest  you  very  much. 
Your  teacher  will  show  you  how  to  use  pretty  coloured 
chalks  in  learning  to  read,  and  to  spell  and  to  write, 
and  you  will  find  that  you  will  learn  to  read  more  easily 
than  mother  or  father  did,  and  will  really  understand  a 
great  deal  more  about  your  own  language  than  I  did 
when  I  began  to  read  and  write.  But  you  must  not 
think  because  it  will  be  a  more  interesting  and  a  better 
way  of  learning,  it  will  need  no  work.  There  is  nothing 
worth  having  in  this  world  which  can  be  had  without 
taking  trouble — and  this  is  quite  as  true  of  your  own 
language,  English,  as  it  is  of  other  things.  You,  no 
doubt,  think  people  who  can  speak  French  and  German 

162 


On  the  Teaching  of  English  Reading   163 

very  clever.  Well,  some  day  you  will  probably  do  the 
same,  but  there  is  really  quite  as  much  to  learn  about  in 
your  own  tongue  as  in  these  foreign  ones.  English  is  a 
very  noble  and  a  very  ancient  speech.  It  has  taken  a  very 
long  time  to  grow  into  its  present  shape,  and  this  long  his- 
tory has  made  it  very  rich  and  full  of  meaning,  but  also 
very  hard  to  master  thoroughly.  It  was  spoken  by  your 
far-away  ancestors  before  they  ever  dreamt  of  coming  to 
this  beautiful  land,  in  the  distant  days  when  they  lived  as 
three  separate  tribes  on  the  shores  of  the  North  Sea,  the 
flat,  sandy  plains  of  Northern  Germany.  Your  history 
books  will  tell  you  that  these  three  tribes  were  called  the 
Jutes,  the  Saxons,  and  the  Angles.  They  were  not  a  very 
gentle  people ;  they  were  fond  of  sea-robbery  and  fighting, 
but  they  were  very  earnest  and  very  hardy,  and,  in  their 
own  savage  way,  very  religious.  Their  language  was  in 
some  things  much  simpler  than  yours  :  they  had  far  fewer 
words  and  fewer  ideas,  but  the  words  themselves  were 
longer,  and  they  changed  their  shape  according  to  the  use 
they  were  put  to  in  talking.  Some  of  our  words  change  in 
shape  in  this  way,  but  only  very  few.  Those  early  Eng- 
lishmen changed  nearly  all  of  them.*  And  their  language 
had  very  few  words  in  it  which  other  people,  speaking 
another  speech,  had  lent  them.  There  were  no  railways 
and  no  good  roads,  no  boats,  except  very  small  ones,  and 
nothing  but  very  rough  carts.  So  people  could  not  move 

*  Note. — Explain  that  as  we  change  the  form  of  our  pronouns 
according  to  their  use  in  the  sentence,  and  the  form  of  our  verbs  to 
express  tense  and  number,  so  they  changed  also  the  forms  of  nouns  and 
adjectives.  But  do  not  use  any  grammatical  terms  in  your  explanation, 
only  give  examples. 


1 64  On  the  Teaching 

far  from  their  homes,  unless  they  rode  on  horseback, 
a-hunting  or  a-fighting.  There  were  no  books  and 
scarcely  any  writing,  so  they  were  not  able,  even  had 
they  wished  it,  which  they  did  not,  to  learn  much  about 
the  ways  of  other  people  living  at  a  distance,  or  much 
about  their  kind  of  talk.  But  by  degrees  all  this  has 
been  changed.  It  is  easier  nowadays  to  travel  to  Italy 
or  Germany  than  it  was  in  those  times  to  journey  from 
the  Thames  to  the  south  coast  of  this  England  of  ours. 
You  will  learn  in  your  history  lessons  how  this  wonderful 
growth  has  gradually  come  to  pass.  Now,  I  want  to  tell 
you  that  all  this  time  our  language  was  slowly  growing  too, 
to  suit  the  new  uses  to  which  it  had  to  be  put.  As  you 
grow  bigger,  your  shoes  and  gloves  and  other  clothes  soon 
become  too  small  for  you,  but  you  do  not  find  that  your 
skin  gets  too  tight  or  your  feet  too  small  to  carry  you. 
That  is  because  your  skin  and  your  feet  are  alive,  and  grow 
as  you  grow.  And  so  it  is  with  your  way  of  talking.  As 
you  grow  older,  you  are  able  to  use  more  words,  and  talk 
more  and  more  like  father  and  mother,  and  understand 
more  of  what  they  say.  So,  too,  it  has  been  with  the  life 
of  the  English  people  and  the  English  language.  When  the 
English  came  across  to  this  country,  they  saw  many  things 
they  had  never  seen  before;  they  heard  a  new  language 
spoken  by  the  people  who  were  living  here  when  they 
came.  These  people  were  called  the  Celts.  The  Welsh 
and  the  Southern  Irish  have  come  down  from  them.  So 
the  English  had  to  borrow  words  from  the  Celts  for  many 
of  the  new  things  they  saw.  Then,  in  time,  good  men  came 
from  Italy  to  teach  the  English  about  the  Christian  religion, 


of  English  Reading  165 

and  so  again  they  had  to  borrow  new  words.  Then,  much 
later,  more  than  two  hundred  years  afterwards,  the  coasts  of 
England  were  attacked  by  fierce  fighters  from  the  North, 
from  Norway  and  Denmark.  Later  still,  this  whole  country 
was  conquered  by  some  of  these  Northmen,  who  had  first  of 
all  taken  the  North  of  France,  now  called  Normandy,  and 
then  came,  under  their  leader,  the  brave  Duke  "William, 
and  defeated  the  English,  and  took  London  and  all  the 
country  so  far  north  as  Edinburgh.  This  was  a  very  sad 
time  for  the  English,  but  they  were  brave,  and  did  not 
despair,  so  in  the  end  they  became  stronger,  and  richer,  and 
happier  than  ever.  And  their  language,  English,  grew 
stronger  too.  During  these  hard  years,  under  the  rule  of 
a  strong  foe,  the  English  tongue  was  slowly  being  shaped, 
The  English  came  to  speak  more  simply  in  many  ways ; 
their  language  was  easier  to  use,  better  for  speaking,  and, 
above  all,  better  for  writing.  They  had  also  taken  hun- 
dreds and  hundreds  of  words  from  these  Danes  and 
Normans  who  had  been  so  cruel,  and  made  them  their  own, 
and  from  those  days  till  now — for  nearly  a  thousand  years — 
they  have  been  always  searching  for  words  which  might  help 
them  to  say  what  they  want  to  say.  And  these  new  words 
are  nearly  always  foreign  ones,  or  built  up  from  foreign 
ones.  That  is  why  English  is  so  hard  to  master.  There 
are  so  many  thousands  of  words,  each  of  which  should  be 
properly  used  and  many  of  them  very  much  alike  in  meaning 
and  yet  not  quite  alike.  But  that  is  not  all.  The  English 
speech  has  grown  with  the  English  people  just  as  your  skin 
or  your  feet  grow  with  you,  but  the  way  of  writing  and 
spelling  English  has  not  grown  quite  so  fast.  The  spelling 


1 66  On  the  Teaching 

is  like  a  pair  of  shoes  which  have  become  too  small  for  you. 
They  are  not  very  easy  to  your  feet,  though  you  may  be 
very  fond  of  them  because  you  have  had  them  for  so  long 
and  because  they  were  once  very  pretty.  So  the  spelling  of 
English  is  not  very  easy,  because  it  has  not  grown  quite  so 
fast  as  the  English  language.  I  dare  say  you  will  say,  why 
not  get  a  new  spelling  just  as  mother  is  going  to  buy  me  a 
new  pair  of  shoes  ?  Well,  that  is  not  a  very  easy  thing  to 
do.  Some  day  you  will  see  better  why.  And  there  are 
many  very  good  reasons,  which  you  will  find  out  for  your- 
selves by  degrees,  for  keeping  the  spelling  as  it  is,  though  it 
is  hard.  Besides,  it  is  not  so  difficult  that  you  cannot  learn 
it  if  you  try,  and  your  teacher,  I  am  sure,  will  make  you 
think  it  the  most  delightful  of  all  the  lessons  you  have.  But 
be  sure  to  remember  what  a  noble  thing  your  own  language 
is,  how  it  has  taken  your  grandfathers  and  great-grand- 
fathers, and  their  fathers  and  grandfathers,  many  hundreds 
of  years  to  bring  to  its  present  shape.  If  they  had  not 
been  good  and  true  and  earnest,  their  speech  would  not 
have  become  strong  and  free,  and  if  you  do  not  strive 
in  your  turn  you  will  not  be  worthy  to  use  this  wonder- 
ful language  which  can  be  put  on  paper  so  that  though 
you  have  never  seen  me  with  your  eyes,  yet  you  can 
hear  me  speaking  to  you  when  your  teacher  reads  this 
aloud  to  you.  There  was  once  a  time  when  no  one  could 
write  or  read.  Then  slowly,  slowly  with  great  patience 
people  learnt  these  two  things.  Many  more  hundred  years 
passed  before  there  were  any  books,  and  again  hundreds 
of  years  before  there  was  any  printing.  For  a  long  time 
every  book  had  to  be  written,  and  this  was  very  hard 


of  English  Reading  167 

work.  But  about  five  hundred  years  ago  the  art  of  printing 
was  invented,  and  since  then  books  have  become  very 
plentiful  and  so  cheap  that  we  can  all  of  us  enjoy  the  works 
of  great  men  who  have  made  our  country  famous,  and  learn 
from  them  how  to  make  our  own  lives  sweet  and  useful  to 
all  around  us. 


LIST  OF  NATURE  TALKS  AND  COSY  CHATS. 

SUGGESTED  IN  THE  RUNNING  COMMENTARY  (See  p.  32). 
In  connection  with  the  First  Primer. 

Study  1.  Hat.     Fox-terrier.     Hill.- 

„  2.  Crab.     Dab. 

»  3.  Cat. 

»  5.  Duck.     Hay. 

»  6.  Stag.     Rocks. 

»  7.  Ram. 

»  8.  Pan.     Shilling.     Bran. 

»  10.  Persian  cat. 

»»  11.  Horse.     Ash-tree. 

»  12.  Flax. 

»  15.  Model  of  a  bog. 

»  16.  Coast.     Sand. 

>i  18.  Flag  (iris).     Wasp.     Swan. 

In  connection  with  the  Second  Primer. 

Study  19.  Donkey. 
>»       20.  Ship  and  sails. 

21.  Tom-tit. 
»       22.  Goat. 
»»       23.  Lily. 

168 


On  the  Teaching  of  English  Reading  169 

Study  24.  Pig.     Pond. 

»>  25.  Newfoundland  dog. 

»  26.  Gold-fish. 

»  27.  Heath  with  ling. 

»  29.  Hill  and  rill.     Mill. 

»  30.  Quill. 

»  31.  Water-rat.     Eobin. 

»  32.  Hen  and  chickens. 

»  33.  Mink.     Ink. 

»  34.  Points  of  compass. 

»  35.  Shrimp. 

36.  Flint. 

»  39.  Lock  (in  river). 

»  40.  Volcano.     Mist. 

»  42.  Collie.     Quince. 

»  43.  Chaffinch  and  nest.     Apple-blossom. 

»  44.  Story  of  Frog  Prince. 

»  45.  Eidge  of  hills.     Gnats. 

»  46.  Bull.     Shells. 

In  connection  with  the  Infant  Reader. 

Study  48.   Pug-dog.     Bear  and  cubs. 

»  49.  Nuts. 

»  50.  Duck  and  ducklings. 

»  51.  Slugs. 

»  52.  Gum.     History  of  a  pot  of  plum  jam. 

»  53.  Frogs.     Silkworms. 

»  56.   Sixpence. 

57.  Thrush. 

»»  59.  Sand  (revision;  see  Study  16). 


1 70  On  the  Teaching  of  English  Reading 

Study  60.   Sugar. 

»      61.  Pig  (revision;  see  Study  24).     Pencil 

»       62.  Frogs  (revision;  see  Study  53). 

»       63.  Gully.     Wind. 

»       64.  Habits  of  the  Dutch.     Windmill.      Eabbits. 

»       66.  Hemp. 

»»       67.  Bracken. 

»       68.  Swan  (revision  ;  see  Study  18).     String. 

69.  Fen. 

»>       70.  Hollyhocks. 
»>       71.  Cress. 
»       72.  Wild  duck.     Eobin  (revision ;  see  Study  31). 

Vetches. 
»       73.  Hops  (in  connection  with  Kent). 

74.  Tench.     Fog. 

76.  Wren. 

78.  Elm. 

»       79.  Peninsula  (Italy). 
»       80.  Peas.     Cod-fish. 
»       81.  Sheep.     Sheep-dog. 

»       82.   Bog  (revision;  see  Study  15).     Bulrushes. 
»>       84.  Bat.     Fox.     Scotch  oxen. 
»      86.  Lamb. 


TABLES   OF   CONSONANTS   AND 
VOWELS 


172 


Table  of  Consonants. 

(For  Colours  see  Plate  1.) 


Double  Sounds. 


5Q 

x 

'p 

n 

7k* 

•b 

•d 

•g                     ' 

X 

nk 

.m 

.„ 

»ng 

**nqu 

U] 

**ng 

* 

ch 
tch 

whf 

«rf 

"th 

».       ^8h 

«ht 

g 

"Ph 

22°       ^Ch 

dg 

74W 

23  s 

»wh 

54  z 

J 

*  See  Notes,  pp.  43,  60.  t  See  Note,  p.  57. 

**  nqu  and  ng  appear  in  Book  I. 


J  See  p.  75. 


. — The  children  have  much  practice  in  going  through  the  sounds  in  the 
above  order,  so  that  they -may  fully  grasp  their  classification, 


Key  to  Table  of  Consonants         173 


cat 

six 

Fg 

tub 

Mng 

guack 

6ag 

dog 

"" 

exact 

mat 

net 

- 

jonquil 

lily 

finger 

chat 

rat 

match 

/ish 

sun       ship 

*whip 

thrush 

hen 

PMlip 

mince     finc7< 

magic 

wet 

crabs 

bric&/e 

valley 

them 

treasure 

whip 

buss 

jump 

*  See  p.  57. 
Note. — The  above  words  are  those  from  which  the  children  evolve  the  sounds. 


174 


Table  of  Vowels 


(For  Colours  set  Plate  2-) 


Vy 


e 


7o 


Bu 


Key  to  Table  of  Vowels. 

til,  kitty  pwll 

egg  top 

bat  muff 

Note. — The  numbers  indicate  the  order  in  which  the  children  revise 
the  symbols  for  the  vowel  sounds.    (See  "  Further  Notes,"  pp.  90,  91.) 


The  Dale   Method   of  Teaching 
Reading 

THE  DALE  READERS. 
Written  by  Nellie  Dale  and  illustrated  by  Walter  Crane. 
*  STEPS  TO  READING    .        .       .       4d.  net. 
FIRST  PRIMER      ....       yd. 
SECOND  PRIMER  .       ...       84 
INFANT  READER  Qd. 

BOOK  I is. 

BOOK  II is.  2d. 

BOOK  III In  Preparation. 

TEACHER'S  HANDBOOKS. 

ON  THE  TEACHING  OF  ENGLISH  READING.    By 
Nellie  Dale.    2s.  6d.  net 

FURTHER  NOTES  ON  THE  TEACHING  OF  ENG- 
LISH READING.    By  Nellie  Dale.    33.  net 

APPARATUS. 
DALE'S  TABULATING  FRAME.    22s.  6d.  net 

SET  OF  SYMBOLS  FOR  USE  WITH  THE  FRAME. 

53.  6d.  net 

*  CARDS  FOR  THE  PRICKING  AND  EMBROIDERY 

OF  THE  SYMBOLS.     Series  A  and  B.    is.  net  per 
packet.    Series  C  in  preparation. 

*  Now  published  by  Messrs  J.  M.  DENT  &  CO.,  but  shortly  to  be  issued 

by  Messrs  GEORGE  PHILIP  &  SON,  Ltd. 

A  descriptive  list  of  the  books  and  apparatus  will  be  sent  post  free 
on  application  to  the  publishers. 

GEORGE  PHILIP  &  SON,  Ltd.,  32  Fleet  Street,  London. 

PHILIP,  SON  &  NEPHEW,  Ltd.,  45-51  South  Castle  St, 
Liverpool. 


EDINBURGH 


TURNBULL 
&     SPEARS 


u 


University  of  Toronto 
Library 


DO  NOT 

REMOVE 

THE 

CARD 

FROM 

THIS 

POCKET 


Acme  Library  Card  Pocket 

Under  Pat.  "Ref.  Index  File" 
Made  by  LIBRARY  BUREAU